Home | History | Annotate | Line # | Download | only in bfd
elf32-hppa.c revision 1.15
      1   1.1     skrll /* BFD back-end for HP PA-RISC ELF files.
      2  1.15  christos    Copyright (C) 1990-2024 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
      3   1.1     skrll 
      4   1.1     skrll    Original code by
      5   1.1     skrll 	Center for Software Science
      6   1.1     skrll 	Department of Computer Science
      7   1.1     skrll 	University of Utah
      8   1.1     skrll    Largely rewritten by Alan Modra <alan (at) linuxcare.com.au>
      9   1.1     skrll    Naming cleanup by Carlos O'Donell <carlos (at) systemhalted.org>
     10   1.1     skrll    TLS support written by Randolph Chung <tausq (at) debian.org>
     11   1.7  christos 
     12   1.1     skrll    This file is part of BFD, the Binary File Descriptor library.
     13   1.1     skrll 
     14   1.1     skrll    This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
     15   1.1     skrll    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
     16   1.1     skrll    the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or
     17   1.1     skrll    (at your option) any later version.
     18   1.1     skrll 
     19   1.1     skrll    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
     20   1.1     skrll    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
     21   1.1     skrll    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
     22   1.1     skrll    GNU General Public License for more details.
     23   1.1     skrll 
     24   1.1     skrll    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
     25   1.1     skrll    along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
     26   1.1     skrll    Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street - Fifth Floor, Boston,
     27   1.1     skrll    MA 02110-1301, USA.  */
     28   1.1     skrll 
     29   1.1     skrll #include "sysdep.h"
     30   1.1     skrll #include "bfd.h"
     31   1.1     skrll #include "libbfd.h"
     32   1.1     skrll #include "elf-bfd.h"
     33   1.1     skrll #include "elf/hppa.h"
     34   1.1     skrll #include "libhppa.h"
     35   1.1     skrll #include "elf32-hppa.h"
     36   1.1     skrll #define ARCH_SIZE		32
     37   1.1     skrll #include "elf32-hppa.h"
     38   1.1     skrll #include "elf-hppa.h"
     39   1.1     skrll 
     40   1.1     skrll /* In order to gain some understanding of code in this file without
     41   1.1     skrll    knowing all the intricate details of the linker, note the
     42   1.1     skrll    following:
     43   1.1     skrll 
     44   1.1     skrll    Functions named elf32_hppa_* are called by external routines, other
     45   1.1     skrll    functions are only called locally.  elf32_hppa_* functions appear
     46   1.1     skrll    in this file more or less in the order in which they are called
     47   1.1     skrll    from external routines.  eg. elf32_hppa_check_relocs is called
     48   1.1     skrll    early in the link process, elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_sections is
     49   1.1     skrll    one of the last functions.  */
     50   1.1     skrll 
     51   1.1     skrll /* We use two hash tables to hold information for linking PA ELF objects.
     52   1.1     skrll 
     53   1.1     skrll    The first is the elf32_hppa_link_hash_table which is derived
     54   1.1     skrll    from the standard ELF linker hash table.  We use this as a place to
     55   1.1     skrll    attach other hash tables and static information.
     56   1.1     skrll 
     57   1.1     skrll    The second is the stub hash table which is derived from the
     58   1.1     skrll    base BFD hash table.  The stub hash table holds the information
     59   1.1     skrll    necessary to build the linker stubs during a link.
     60   1.1     skrll 
     61   1.1     skrll    There are a number of different stubs generated by the linker.
     62   1.1     skrll 
     63   1.1     skrll    Long branch stub:
     64   1.1     skrll    :		ldil LR'X,%r1
     65   1.1     skrll    :		be,n RR'X(%sr4,%r1)
     66   1.1     skrll 
     67   1.1     skrll    PIC long branch stub:
     68   1.1     skrll    :		b,l .+8,%r1
     69   1.1     skrll    :		addil LR'X - ($PIC_pcrel$0 - 4),%r1
     70   1.1     skrll    :		be,n RR'X - ($PIC_pcrel$0 - 8)(%sr4,%r1)
     71   1.1     skrll 
     72   1.1     skrll    Import stub to call shared library routine from normal object file
     73   1.1     skrll    (single sub-space version)
     74  1.13  christos    :		addil LR'lt_ptr+ltoff,%dp	; get PLT address
     75  1.13  christos    :		ldo RR'lt_ptr+ltoff(%r1),%r22   ;
     76  1.13  christos    :		ldw 0(%r22),%r21		; get procedure entry point
     77   1.1     skrll    :		bv %r0(%r21)
     78  1.13  christos    :		ldw 4(%r22),%r19		; get new dlt value.
     79   1.1     skrll 
     80   1.1     skrll    Import stub to call shared library routine from shared library
     81   1.1     skrll    (single sub-space version)
     82  1.13  christos    :		addil LR'ltoff,%r19		; get PLT address
     83  1.13  christos    :		ldo RR'ltoff(%r1),%r22
     84  1.13  christos    :		ldw 0(%r22),%r21		; get procedure entry point
     85   1.1     skrll    :		bv %r0(%r21)
     86  1.13  christos    :		ldw 4(%r22),%r19		; get new dlt value.
     87   1.1     skrll 
     88   1.1     skrll    Import stub to call shared library routine from normal object file
     89   1.1     skrll    (multiple sub-space support)
     90  1.13  christos    :		addil LR'lt_ptr+ltoff,%dp	; get PLT address
     91  1.13  christos    :		ldo RR'lt_ptr+ltoff(%r1),%r22   ;
     92  1.13  christos    :		ldw 0(%r22),%r21		; get procedure entry point
     93  1.13  christos    :		ldsid (%r21),%r1		; get target sid
     94  1.13  christos    :		ldw 4(%r22),%r19		; get new dlt value.
     95   1.1     skrll    :		mtsp %r1,%sr0
     96   1.1     skrll    :		be 0(%sr0,%r21)			; branch to target
     97   1.1     skrll    :		stw %rp,-24(%sp)		; save rp
     98   1.1     skrll 
     99   1.1     skrll    Import stub to call shared library routine from shared library
    100   1.1     skrll    (multiple sub-space support)
    101  1.13  christos    :		addil LR'ltoff,%r19		; get PLT address
    102  1.13  christos    :		ldo RR'ltoff(%r1),%r22
    103  1.13  christos    :		ldw 0(%r22),%r21		; get procedure entry point
    104  1.13  christos    :		ldsid (%r21),%r1		; get target sid
    105  1.13  christos    :		ldw 4(%r22),%r19		; get new dlt value.
    106   1.1     skrll    :		mtsp %r1,%sr0
    107   1.1     skrll    :		be 0(%sr0,%r21)			; branch to target
    108   1.1     skrll    :		stw %rp,-24(%sp)		; save rp
    109   1.1     skrll 
    110   1.1     skrll    Export stub to return from shared lib routine (multiple sub-space support)
    111   1.1     skrll    One of these is created for each exported procedure in a shared
    112   1.1     skrll    library (and stored in the shared lib).  Shared lib routines are
    113   1.1     skrll    called via the first instruction in the export stub so that we can
    114   1.1     skrll    do an inter-space return.  Not required for single sub-space.
    115   1.1     skrll    :		bl,n X,%rp			; trap the return
    116   1.1     skrll    :		nop
    117   1.1     skrll    :		ldw -24(%sp),%rp		; restore the original rp
    118   1.1     skrll    :		ldsid (%rp),%r1
    119   1.1     skrll    :		mtsp %r1,%sr0
    120   1.1     skrll    :		be,n 0(%sr0,%rp)		; inter-space return.  */
    121   1.1     skrll 
    122   1.1     skrll 
    123   1.1     skrll /* Variable names follow a coding style.
    124   1.1     skrll    Please follow this (Apps Hungarian) style:
    125   1.1     skrll 
    126  1.11  christos    Structure/Variable			Prefix
    127   1.1     skrll    elf_link_hash_table			"etab"
    128   1.1     skrll    elf_link_hash_entry			"eh"
    129   1.7  christos 
    130   1.1     skrll    elf32_hppa_link_hash_table		"htab"
    131   1.1     skrll    elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry		"hh"
    132   1.1     skrll 
    133   1.1     skrll    bfd_hash_table			"btab"
    134   1.1     skrll    bfd_hash_entry			"bh"
    135   1.7  christos 
    136   1.1     skrll    bfd_hash_table containing stubs	"bstab"
    137   1.1     skrll    elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry		"hsh"
    138   1.1     skrll 
    139   1.1     skrll    Always remember to use GNU Coding Style. */
    140   1.7  christos 
    141   1.1     skrll #define PLT_ENTRY_SIZE 8
    142   1.1     skrll #define GOT_ENTRY_SIZE 4
    143  1.13  christos #define LONG_BRANCH_STUB_SIZE 8
    144  1.13  christos #define LONG_BRANCH_SHARED_STUB_SIZE 12
    145  1.13  christos #define IMPORT_STUB_SIZE 20
    146  1.13  christos #define IMPORT_SHARED_STUB_SIZE 32
    147  1.13  christos #define EXPORT_STUB_SIZE 24
    148   1.1     skrll #define ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER "/lib/ld.so.1"
    149   1.1     skrll 
    150   1.1     skrll static const bfd_byte plt_stub[] =
    151   1.1     skrll {
    152  1.13  christos   0x0e, 0x80, 0x10, 0x95,  /* 1: ldw	0(%r20),%r21		*/
    153  1.13  christos   0xea, 0xa0, 0xc0, 0x00,  /*    bv	%r0(%r21)		*/
    154   1.1     skrll   0x0e, 0x88, 0x10, 0x95,  /*    ldw	4(%r20),%r21		*/
    155   1.1     skrll #define PLT_STUB_ENTRY (3*4)
    156   1.1     skrll   0xea, 0x9f, 0x1f, 0xdd,  /*    b,l	1b,%r20			*/
    157   1.1     skrll   0xd6, 0x80, 0x1c, 0x1e,  /*    depi	0,31,2,%r20		*/
    158   1.1     skrll   0x00, 0xc0, 0xff, 0xee,  /* 9: .word	fixup_func		*/
    159   1.1     skrll   0xde, 0xad, 0xbe, 0xef   /*    .word	fixup_ltp		*/
    160   1.1     skrll };
    161   1.1     skrll 
    162   1.1     skrll /* Section name for stubs is the associated section name plus this
    163   1.1     skrll    string.  */
    164   1.1     skrll #define STUB_SUFFIX ".stub"
    165   1.1     skrll 
    166   1.1     skrll /* We don't need to copy certain PC- or GP-relative dynamic relocs
    167   1.1     skrll    into a shared object's dynamic section.  All the relocs of the
    168   1.1     skrll    limited class we are interested in, are absolute.  */
    169   1.1     skrll #ifndef RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
    170   1.1     skrll #define RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS 0
    171   1.1     skrll #define IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC(r_type) 1
    172  1.11  christos #define pc_dynrelocs(hh) 0
    173   1.1     skrll #endif
    174   1.1     skrll 
    175   1.1     skrll /* If ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS is non-zero, the linker will try to avoid
    176   1.1     skrll    copying dynamic variables from a shared lib into an app's dynbss
    177   1.1     skrll    section, and instead use a dynamic relocation to point into the
    178   1.1     skrll    shared lib.  */
    179   1.1     skrll #define ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS 1
    180   1.1     skrll 
    181   1.1     skrll enum elf32_hppa_stub_type
    182   1.1     skrll {
    183   1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_long_branch,
    184   1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_long_branch_shared,
    185   1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_import,
    186   1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_import_shared,
    187   1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_export,
    188   1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_none
    189   1.1     skrll };
    190   1.1     skrll 
    191   1.1     skrll struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry
    192   1.1     skrll {
    193   1.1     skrll   /* Base hash table entry structure.  */
    194   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_hash_entry bh_root;
    195   1.1     skrll 
    196   1.1     skrll   /* The stub section.  */
    197   1.1     skrll   asection *stub_sec;
    198   1.1     skrll 
    199   1.1     skrll   /* Offset within stub_sec of the beginning of this stub.  */
    200   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma stub_offset;
    201   1.1     skrll 
    202   1.1     skrll   /* Given the symbol's value and its section we can determine its final
    203   1.1     skrll      value when building the stubs (so the stub knows where to jump.  */
    204   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma target_value;
    205   1.1     skrll   asection *target_section;
    206   1.1     skrll 
    207   1.1     skrll   enum elf32_hppa_stub_type stub_type;
    208   1.1     skrll 
    209   1.1     skrll   /* The symbol table entry, if any, that this was derived from.  */
    210   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
    211   1.1     skrll 
    212   1.1     skrll   /* Where this stub is being called from, or, in the case of combined
    213   1.1     skrll      stub sections, the first input section in the group.  */
    214   1.1     skrll   asection *id_sec;
    215   1.1     skrll };
    216   1.1     skrll 
    217  1.11  christos enum _tls_type
    218  1.11  christos   {
    219  1.11  christos     GOT_UNKNOWN = 0,
    220  1.11  christos     GOT_NORMAL = 1,
    221  1.11  christos     GOT_TLS_GD = 2,
    222  1.11  christos     GOT_TLS_LDM = 4,
    223  1.11  christos     GOT_TLS_IE = 8
    224  1.11  christos   };
    225  1.11  christos 
    226   1.1     skrll struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry
    227   1.1     skrll {
    228   1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry eh;
    229   1.1     skrll 
    230   1.1     skrll   /* A pointer to the most recently used stub hash entry against this
    231   1.1     skrll      symbol.  */
    232   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh_cache;
    233   1.1     skrll 
    234  1.11  christos   ENUM_BITFIELD (_tls_type) tls_type : 8;
    235   1.1     skrll 
    236   1.1     skrll   /* Set if this symbol is used by a plabel reloc.  */
    237   1.1     skrll   unsigned int plabel:1;
    238   1.1     skrll };
    239   1.1     skrll 
    240   1.1     skrll struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table
    241   1.1     skrll {
    242   1.1     skrll   /* The main hash table.  */
    243   1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_table etab;
    244   1.1     skrll 
    245   1.1     skrll   /* The stub hash table.  */
    246   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_hash_table bstab;
    247   1.1     skrll 
    248   1.1     skrll   /* Linker stub bfd.  */
    249   1.1     skrll   bfd *stub_bfd;
    250   1.1     skrll 
    251   1.1     skrll   /* Linker call-backs.  */
    252   1.1     skrll   asection * (*add_stub_section) (const char *, asection *);
    253   1.1     skrll   void (*layout_sections_again) (void);
    254   1.1     skrll 
    255   1.1     skrll   /* Array to keep track of which stub sections have been created, and
    256   1.1     skrll      information on stub grouping.  */
    257   1.1     skrll   struct map_stub
    258   1.1     skrll   {
    259   1.1     skrll     /* This is the section to which stubs in the group will be
    260   1.1     skrll        attached.  */
    261   1.1     skrll     asection *link_sec;
    262   1.1     skrll     /* The stub section.  */
    263   1.1     skrll     asection *stub_sec;
    264   1.1     skrll   } *stub_group;
    265   1.1     skrll 
    266   1.1     skrll   /* Assorted information used by elf32_hppa_size_stubs.  */
    267   1.1     skrll   unsigned int bfd_count;
    268   1.7  christos   unsigned int top_index;
    269   1.1     skrll   asection **input_list;
    270   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Sym **all_local_syms;
    271   1.1     skrll 
    272   1.1     skrll   /* Used during a final link to store the base of the text and data
    273   1.1     skrll      segments so that we can perform SEGREL relocations.  */
    274   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma text_segment_base;
    275   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma data_segment_base;
    276   1.1     skrll 
    277   1.1     skrll   /* Whether we support multiple sub-spaces for shared libs.  */
    278   1.1     skrll   unsigned int multi_subspace:1;
    279   1.1     skrll 
    280   1.1     skrll   /* Flags set when various size branches are detected.  Used to
    281   1.1     skrll      select suitable defaults for the stub group size.  */
    282   1.1     skrll   unsigned int has_12bit_branch:1;
    283   1.1     skrll   unsigned int has_17bit_branch:1;
    284   1.1     skrll   unsigned int has_22bit_branch:1;
    285   1.1     skrll 
    286   1.1     skrll   /* Set if we need a .plt stub to support lazy dynamic linking.  */
    287   1.1     skrll   unsigned int need_plt_stub:1;
    288   1.1     skrll 
    289   1.1     skrll   /* Data for LDM relocations.  */
    290   1.1     skrll   union
    291   1.1     skrll   {
    292   1.1     skrll     bfd_signed_vma refcount;
    293   1.1     skrll     bfd_vma offset;
    294   1.1     skrll   } tls_ldm_got;
    295   1.1     skrll };
    296   1.1     skrll 
    297   1.1     skrll /* Various hash macros and functions.  */
    298   1.1     skrll #define hppa_link_hash_table(p) \
    299  1.14  christos   ((is_elf_hash_table ((p)->hash)					\
    300  1.14  christos     && elf_hash_table_id (elf_hash_table (p)) == HPPA32_ELF_DATA)	\
    301  1.14  christos    ? (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *) (p)->hash : NULL)
    302   1.1     skrll 
    303   1.1     skrll #define hppa_elf_hash_entry(ent) \
    304   1.1     skrll   ((struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *)(ent))
    305   1.1     skrll 
    306   1.1     skrll #define hppa_stub_hash_entry(ent) \
    307   1.1     skrll   ((struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *)(ent))
    308   1.1     skrll 
    309   1.1     skrll #define hppa_stub_hash_lookup(table, string, create, copy) \
    310   1.1     skrll   ((struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *) \
    311   1.1     skrll    bfd_hash_lookup ((table), (string), (create), (copy)))
    312   1.1     skrll 
    313   1.1     skrll #define hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type(abfd) \
    314   1.1     skrll   ((char *)(elf_local_got_offsets (abfd) + (elf_tdata (abfd)->symtab_hdr.sh_info * 2)))
    315   1.1     skrll 
    316   1.1     skrll #define hh_name(hh) \
    317   1.1     skrll   (hh ? hh->eh.root.root.string : "<undef>")
    318   1.1     skrll 
    319   1.1     skrll #define eh_name(eh) \
    320   1.1     skrll   (eh ? eh->root.root.string : "<undef>")
    321   1.1     skrll 
    322   1.1     skrll /* Assorted hash table functions.  */
    323   1.1     skrll 
    324   1.1     skrll /* Initialize an entry in the stub hash table.  */
    325   1.1     skrll 
    326   1.1     skrll static struct bfd_hash_entry *
    327   1.1     skrll stub_hash_newfunc (struct bfd_hash_entry *entry,
    328   1.1     skrll 		   struct bfd_hash_table *table,
    329   1.1     skrll 		   const char *string)
    330   1.1     skrll {
    331   1.1     skrll   /* Allocate the structure if it has not already been allocated by a
    332   1.1     skrll      subclass.  */
    333   1.1     skrll   if (entry == NULL)
    334   1.1     skrll     {
    335   1.1     skrll       entry = bfd_hash_allocate (table,
    336   1.1     skrll 				 sizeof (struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry));
    337   1.1     skrll       if (entry == NULL)
    338   1.1     skrll 	return entry;
    339   1.1     skrll     }
    340   1.1     skrll 
    341   1.1     skrll   /* Call the allocation method of the superclass.  */
    342   1.1     skrll   entry = bfd_hash_newfunc (entry, table, string);
    343   1.1     skrll   if (entry != NULL)
    344   1.1     skrll     {
    345   1.1     skrll       struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
    346   1.1     skrll 
    347   1.1     skrll       /* Initialize the local fields.  */
    348   1.1     skrll       hsh = hppa_stub_hash_entry (entry);
    349   1.1     skrll       hsh->stub_sec = NULL;
    350   1.1     skrll       hsh->stub_offset = 0;
    351   1.1     skrll       hsh->target_value = 0;
    352   1.1     skrll       hsh->target_section = NULL;
    353   1.1     skrll       hsh->stub_type = hppa_stub_long_branch;
    354   1.1     skrll       hsh->hh = NULL;
    355   1.1     skrll       hsh->id_sec = NULL;
    356   1.1     skrll     }
    357   1.1     skrll 
    358   1.1     skrll   return entry;
    359   1.1     skrll }
    360   1.1     skrll 
    361   1.1     skrll /* Initialize an entry in the link hash table.  */
    362   1.1     skrll 
    363   1.1     skrll static struct bfd_hash_entry *
    364   1.1     skrll hppa_link_hash_newfunc (struct bfd_hash_entry *entry,
    365   1.1     skrll 			struct bfd_hash_table *table,
    366   1.1     skrll 			const char *string)
    367   1.1     skrll {
    368   1.1     skrll   /* Allocate the structure if it has not already been allocated by a
    369   1.1     skrll      subclass.  */
    370   1.1     skrll   if (entry == NULL)
    371   1.1     skrll     {
    372   1.1     skrll       entry = bfd_hash_allocate (table,
    373   1.1     skrll 				 sizeof (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry));
    374   1.1     skrll       if (entry == NULL)
    375   1.1     skrll 	return entry;
    376   1.1     skrll     }
    377   1.1     skrll 
    378   1.1     skrll   /* Call the allocation method of the superclass.  */
    379   1.1     skrll   entry = _bfd_elf_link_hash_newfunc (entry, table, string);
    380   1.1     skrll   if (entry != NULL)
    381   1.1     skrll     {
    382   1.1     skrll       struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
    383   1.1     skrll 
    384   1.1     skrll       /* Initialize the local fields.  */
    385   1.1     skrll       hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (entry);
    386   1.1     skrll       hh->hsh_cache = NULL;
    387   1.1     skrll       hh->plabel = 0;
    388   1.1     skrll       hh->tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
    389   1.1     skrll     }
    390   1.1     skrll 
    391   1.1     skrll   return entry;
    392   1.1     skrll }
    393   1.1     skrll 
    394   1.7  christos /* Free the derived linker hash table.  */
    395   1.7  christos 
    396   1.7  christos static void
    397   1.7  christos elf32_hppa_link_hash_table_free (bfd *obfd)
    398   1.7  christos {
    399   1.7  christos   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab
    400   1.7  christos     = (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *) obfd->link.hash;
    401   1.7  christos 
    402   1.7  christos   bfd_hash_table_free (&htab->bstab);
    403   1.7  christos   _bfd_elf_link_hash_table_free (obfd);
    404   1.7  christos }
    405   1.7  christos 
    406   1.1     skrll /* Create the derived linker hash table.  The PA ELF port uses the derived
    407   1.1     skrll    hash table to keep information specific to the PA ELF linker (without
    408   1.1     skrll    using static variables).  */
    409   1.1     skrll 
    410   1.1     skrll static struct bfd_link_hash_table *
    411   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_link_hash_table_create (bfd *abfd)
    412   1.1     skrll {
    413   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
    414  1.14  christos   size_t amt = sizeof (*htab);
    415   1.1     skrll 
    416   1.7  christos   htab = bfd_zmalloc (amt);
    417   1.1     skrll   if (htab == NULL)
    418   1.1     skrll     return NULL;
    419   1.1     skrll 
    420   1.1     skrll   if (!_bfd_elf_link_hash_table_init (&htab->etab, abfd, hppa_link_hash_newfunc,
    421   1.3  christos 				      sizeof (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry),
    422   1.3  christos 				      HPPA32_ELF_DATA))
    423   1.1     skrll     {
    424   1.1     skrll       free (htab);
    425   1.1     skrll       return NULL;
    426   1.1     skrll     }
    427   1.1     skrll 
    428   1.1     skrll   /* Init the stub hash table too.  */
    429   1.1     skrll   if (!bfd_hash_table_init (&htab->bstab, stub_hash_newfunc,
    430   1.1     skrll 			    sizeof (struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry)))
    431   1.7  christos     {
    432   1.7  christos       _bfd_elf_link_hash_table_free (abfd);
    433   1.7  christos       return NULL;
    434   1.7  christos     }
    435   1.7  christos   htab->etab.root.hash_table_free = elf32_hppa_link_hash_table_free;
    436  1.14  christos   htab->etab.dt_pltgot_required = true;
    437   1.1     skrll 
    438   1.1     skrll   htab->text_segment_base = (bfd_vma) -1;
    439   1.1     skrll   htab->data_segment_base = (bfd_vma) -1;
    440   1.1     skrll   return &htab->etab.root;
    441   1.1     skrll }
    442   1.1     skrll 
    443  1.10  christos /* Initialize the linker stubs BFD so that we can use it for linker
    444  1.10  christos    created dynamic sections.  */
    445  1.10  christos 
    446  1.10  christos void
    447  1.10  christos elf32_hppa_init_stub_bfd (bfd *abfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
    448  1.10  christos {
    449  1.10  christos   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
    450  1.10  christos 
    451  1.10  christos   elf_elfheader (abfd)->e_ident[EI_CLASS] = ELFCLASS32;
    452  1.10  christos   htab->etab.dynobj = abfd;
    453  1.10  christos }
    454  1.10  christos 
    455   1.1     skrll /* Build a name for an entry in the stub hash table.  */
    456   1.1     skrll 
    457   1.1     skrll static char *
    458   1.1     skrll hppa_stub_name (const asection *input_section,
    459   1.1     skrll 		const asection *sym_sec,
    460   1.1     skrll 		const struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh,
    461   1.1     skrll 		const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela)
    462   1.1     skrll {
    463   1.1     skrll   char *stub_name;
    464   1.1     skrll   bfd_size_type len;
    465   1.1     skrll 
    466   1.1     skrll   if (hh)
    467   1.1     skrll     {
    468   1.1     skrll       len = 8 + 1 + strlen (hh_name (hh)) + 1 + 8 + 1;
    469   1.1     skrll       stub_name = bfd_malloc (len);
    470   1.1     skrll       if (stub_name != NULL)
    471   1.1     skrll 	sprintf (stub_name, "%08x_%s+%x",
    472   1.1     skrll 		 input_section->id & 0xffffffff,
    473   1.1     skrll 		 hh_name (hh),
    474   1.1     skrll 		 (int) rela->r_addend & 0xffffffff);
    475   1.1     skrll     }
    476   1.1     skrll   else
    477   1.1     skrll     {
    478   1.1     skrll       len = 8 + 1 + 8 + 1 + 8 + 1 + 8 + 1;
    479   1.1     skrll       stub_name = bfd_malloc (len);
    480   1.1     skrll       if (stub_name != NULL)
    481   1.1     skrll 	sprintf (stub_name, "%08x_%x:%x+%x",
    482   1.1     skrll 		 input_section->id & 0xffffffff,
    483   1.1     skrll 		 sym_sec->id & 0xffffffff,
    484   1.1     skrll 		 (int) ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info) & 0xffffffff,
    485   1.1     skrll 		 (int) rela->r_addend & 0xffffffff);
    486   1.1     skrll     }
    487   1.1     skrll   return stub_name;
    488   1.1     skrll }
    489   1.1     skrll 
    490   1.1     skrll /* Look up an entry in the stub hash.  Stub entries are cached because
    491   1.1     skrll    creating the stub name takes a bit of time.  */
    492   1.1     skrll 
    493   1.1     skrll static struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *
    494   1.1     skrll hppa_get_stub_entry (const asection *input_section,
    495   1.1     skrll 		     const asection *sym_sec,
    496   1.1     skrll 		     struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh,
    497   1.1     skrll 		     const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela,
    498   1.1     skrll 		     struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab)
    499   1.1     skrll {
    500   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh_entry;
    501   1.1     skrll   const asection *id_sec;
    502   1.1     skrll 
    503   1.1     skrll   /* If this input section is part of a group of sections sharing one
    504   1.1     skrll      stub section, then use the id of the first section in the group.
    505   1.1     skrll      Stub names need to include a section id, as there may well be
    506   1.1     skrll      more than one stub used to reach say, printf, and we need to
    507   1.1     skrll      distinguish between them.  */
    508   1.1     skrll   id_sec = htab->stub_group[input_section->id].link_sec;
    509  1.12  christos   if (id_sec == NULL)
    510  1.12  christos     return NULL;
    511   1.1     skrll 
    512   1.1     skrll   if (hh != NULL && hh->hsh_cache != NULL
    513   1.1     skrll       && hh->hsh_cache->hh == hh
    514   1.1     skrll       && hh->hsh_cache->id_sec == id_sec)
    515   1.1     skrll     {
    516   1.1     skrll       hsh_entry = hh->hsh_cache;
    517   1.1     skrll     }
    518   1.1     skrll   else
    519   1.1     skrll     {
    520   1.1     skrll       char *stub_name;
    521   1.1     skrll 
    522   1.1     skrll       stub_name = hppa_stub_name (id_sec, sym_sec, hh, rela);
    523   1.1     skrll       if (stub_name == NULL)
    524   1.1     skrll 	return NULL;
    525   1.1     skrll 
    526   1.1     skrll       hsh_entry = hppa_stub_hash_lookup (&htab->bstab,
    527  1.14  christos 					  stub_name, false, false);
    528   1.1     skrll       if (hh != NULL)
    529   1.1     skrll 	hh->hsh_cache = hsh_entry;
    530   1.1     skrll 
    531   1.1     skrll       free (stub_name);
    532   1.1     skrll     }
    533   1.1     skrll 
    534   1.1     skrll   return hsh_entry;
    535   1.1     skrll }
    536   1.1     skrll 
    537   1.1     skrll /* Add a new stub entry to the stub hash.  Not all fields of the new
    538   1.1     skrll    stub entry are initialised.  */
    539   1.1     skrll 
    540   1.1     skrll static struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *
    541   1.1     skrll hppa_add_stub (const char *stub_name,
    542   1.1     skrll 	       asection *section,
    543   1.1     skrll 	       struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab)
    544   1.1     skrll {
    545   1.1     skrll   asection *link_sec;
    546   1.1     skrll   asection *stub_sec;
    547   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
    548   1.1     skrll 
    549   1.1     skrll   link_sec = htab->stub_group[section->id].link_sec;
    550   1.1     skrll   stub_sec = htab->stub_group[section->id].stub_sec;
    551   1.1     skrll   if (stub_sec == NULL)
    552   1.1     skrll     {
    553   1.1     skrll       stub_sec = htab->stub_group[link_sec->id].stub_sec;
    554   1.1     skrll       if (stub_sec == NULL)
    555   1.1     skrll 	{
    556   1.1     skrll 	  size_t namelen;
    557   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_size_type len;
    558   1.1     skrll 	  char *s_name;
    559   1.1     skrll 
    560   1.1     skrll 	  namelen = strlen (link_sec->name);
    561   1.1     skrll 	  len = namelen + sizeof (STUB_SUFFIX);
    562   1.1     skrll 	  s_name = bfd_alloc (htab->stub_bfd, len);
    563   1.1     skrll 	  if (s_name == NULL)
    564   1.1     skrll 	    return NULL;
    565   1.1     skrll 
    566   1.1     skrll 	  memcpy (s_name, link_sec->name, namelen);
    567   1.1     skrll 	  memcpy (s_name + namelen, STUB_SUFFIX, sizeof (STUB_SUFFIX));
    568   1.1     skrll 	  stub_sec = (*htab->add_stub_section) (s_name, link_sec);
    569   1.1     skrll 	  if (stub_sec == NULL)
    570   1.1     skrll 	    return NULL;
    571   1.1     skrll 	  htab->stub_group[link_sec->id].stub_sec = stub_sec;
    572   1.1     skrll 	}
    573   1.1     skrll       htab->stub_group[section->id].stub_sec = stub_sec;
    574   1.1     skrll     }
    575   1.1     skrll 
    576   1.1     skrll   /* Enter this entry into the linker stub hash table.  */
    577   1.1     skrll   hsh = hppa_stub_hash_lookup (&htab->bstab, stub_name,
    578  1.14  christos 				      true, false);
    579   1.1     skrll   if (hsh == NULL)
    580   1.1     skrll     {
    581  1.11  christos       /* xgettext:c-format */
    582  1.12  christos       _bfd_error_handler (_("%pB: cannot create stub entry %s"),
    583  1.11  christos 			  section->owner, stub_name);
    584   1.1     skrll       return NULL;
    585   1.1     skrll     }
    586   1.1     skrll 
    587   1.1     skrll   hsh->stub_sec = stub_sec;
    588   1.1     skrll   hsh->stub_offset = 0;
    589   1.1     skrll   hsh->id_sec = link_sec;
    590   1.1     skrll   return hsh;
    591   1.1     skrll }
    592   1.1     skrll 
    593   1.1     skrll /* Determine the type of stub needed, if any, for a call.  */
    594   1.1     skrll 
    595   1.1     skrll static enum elf32_hppa_stub_type
    596   1.1     skrll hppa_type_of_stub (asection *input_sec,
    597   1.1     skrll 		   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela,
    598   1.1     skrll 		   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh,
    599   1.1     skrll 		   bfd_vma destination,
    600   1.1     skrll 		   struct bfd_link_info *info)
    601   1.1     skrll {
    602   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma location;
    603   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma branch_offset;
    604   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma max_branch_offset;
    605   1.1     skrll   unsigned int r_type;
    606   1.1     skrll 
    607   1.1     skrll   if (hh != NULL
    608   1.1     skrll       && hh->eh.plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1
    609   1.1     skrll       && hh->eh.dynindx != -1
    610   1.1     skrll       && !hh->plabel
    611   1.7  christos       && (bfd_link_pic (info)
    612   1.1     skrll 	  || !hh->eh.def_regular
    613   1.1     skrll 	  || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak))
    614   1.1     skrll     {
    615   1.1     skrll       /* We need an import stub.  Decide between hppa_stub_import
    616   1.1     skrll 	 and hppa_stub_import_shared later.  */
    617   1.1     skrll       return hppa_stub_import;
    618   1.1     skrll     }
    619   1.1     skrll 
    620  1.12  christos   if (destination == (bfd_vma) -1)
    621  1.12  christos     return hppa_stub_none;
    622  1.12  christos 
    623   1.1     skrll   /* Determine where the call point is.  */
    624   1.1     skrll   location = (input_sec->output_offset
    625   1.1     skrll 	      + input_sec->output_section->vma
    626   1.1     skrll 	      + rela->r_offset);
    627   1.1     skrll 
    628   1.1     skrll   branch_offset = destination - location - 8;
    629   1.1     skrll   r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info);
    630   1.1     skrll 
    631   1.1     skrll   /* Determine if a long branch stub is needed.  parisc branch offsets
    632   1.1     skrll      are relative to the second instruction past the branch, ie. +8
    633   1.1     skrll      bytes on from the branch instruction location.  The offset is
    634   1.1     skrll      signed and counts in units of 4 bytes.  */
    635   1.1     skrll   if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL17F)
    636   1.1     skrll     max_branch_offset = (1 << (17 - 1)) << 2;
    637   1.1     skrll 
    638   1.1     skrll   else if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL12F)
    639   1.1     skrll     max_branch_offset = (1 << (12 - 1)) << 2;
    640   1.1     skrll 
    641   1.1     skrll   else /* R_PARISC_PCREL22F.  */
    642   1.1     skrll     max_branch_offset = (1 << (22 - 1)) << 2;
    643   1.1     skrll 
    644   1.1     skrll   if (branch_offset + max_branch_offset >= 2*max_branch_offset)
    645   1.1     skrll     return hppa_stub_long_branch;
    646   1.1     skrll 
    647   1.1     skrll   return hppa_stub_none;
    648   1.1     skrll }
    649   1.1     skrll 
    650   1.1     skrll /* Build one linker stub as defined by the stub hash table entry GEN_ENTRY.
    651   1.1     skrll    IN_ARG contains the link info pointer.  */
    652   1.1     skrll 
    653   1.1     skrll #define LDIL_R1		0x20200000	/* ldil  LR'XXX,%r1		*/
    654   1.1     skrll #define BE_SR4_R1	0xe0202002	/* be,n  RR'XXX(%sr4,%r1)	*/
    655   1.1     skrll 
    656   1.1     skrll #define BL_R1		0xe8200000	/* b,l   .+8,%r1		*/
    657   1.1     skrll #define ADDIL_R1	0x28200000	/* addil LR'XXX,%r1,%r1		*/
    658   1.1     skrll #define DEPI_R1		0xd4201c1e	/* depi  0,31,2,%r1		*/
    659   1.1     skrll 
    660   1.1     skrll #define ADDIL_DP	0x2b600000	/* addil LR'XXX,%dp,%r1		*/
    661   1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_R21	0x48350000	/* ldw   RR'XXX(%sr0,%r1),%r21	*/
    662   1.1     skrll #define BV_R0_R21	0xeaa0c000	/* bv    %r0(%r21)		*/
    663   1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_R19	0x48330000	/* ldw   RR'XXX(%sr0,%r1),%r19	*/
    664   1.1     skrll 
    665   1.1     skrll #define ADDIL_R19	0x2a600000	/* addil LR'XXX,%r19,%r1	*/
    666   1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_DP	0x483b0000	/* ldw   RR'XXX(%sr0,%r1),%dp	*/
    667   1.1     skrll 
    668  1.13  christos #define LDO_R1_R22	0x34360000	/* ldo   RR'XXX(%r1),%r22	*/
    669  1.13  christos #define LDW_R22_R21	0x0ec01095	/* ldw   0(%r22),%r21		*/
    670  1.13  christos #define LDW_R22_R19	0x0ec81093	/* ldw   4(%r22),%r19		*/
    671  1.13  christos 
    672   1.1     skrll #define LDSID_R21_R1	0x02a010a1	/* ldsid (%sr0,%r21),%r1	*/
    673   1.1     skrll #define MTSP_R1		0x00011820	/* mtsp  %r1,%sr0		*/
    674   1.1     skrll #define BE_SR0_R21	0xe2a00000	/* be    0(%sr0,%r21)		*/
    675   1.1     skrll #define STW_RP		0x6bc23fd1	/* stw   %rp,-24(%sr0,%sp)	*/
    676   1.1     skrll 
    677   1.1     skrll #define BL22_RP		0xe800a002	/* b,l,n XXX,%rp		*/
    678   1.1     skrll #define BL_RP		0xe8400002	/* b,l,n XXX,%rp		*/
    679   1.1     skrll #define NOP		0x08000240	/* nop				*/
    680   1.1     skrll #define LDW_RP		0x4bc23fd1	/* ldw   -24(%sr0,%sp),%rp	*/
    681   1.1     skrll #define LDSID_RP_R1	0x004010a1	/* ldsid (%sr0,%rp),%r1		*/
    682   1.1     skrll #define BE_SR0_RP	0xe0400002	/* be,n  0(%sr0,%rp)		*/
    683   1.1     skrll 
    684   1.1     skrll #ifndef R19_STUBS
    685   1.1     skrll #define R19_STUBS 1
    686   1.1     skrll #endif
    687   1.1     skrll 
    688   1.1     skrll #if R19_STUBS
    689   1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_DLT	LDW_R1_R19
    690   1.1     skrll #else
    691   1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_DLT	LDW_R1_DP
    692   1.1     skrll #endif
    693   1.1     skrll 
    694  1.14  christos static bool
    695   1.1     skrll hppa_build_one_stub (struct bfd_hash_entry *bh, void *in_arg)
    696   1.1     skrll {
    697   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
    698   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_link_info *info;
    699   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
    700   1.1     skrll   asection *stub_sec;
    701   1.1     skrll   bfd *stub_bfd;
    702   1.1     skrll   bfd_byte *loc;
    703   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma sym_value;
    704   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma insn;
    705   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma off;
    706   1.1     skrll   int val;
    707   1.1     skrll   int size;
    708   1.1     skrll 
    709   1.1     skrll   /* Massage our args to the form they really have.  */
    710   1.1     skrll   hsh = hppa_stub_hash_entry (bh);
    711   1.1     skrll   info = (struct bfd_link_info *)in_arg;
    712   1.1     skrll 
    713   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
    714   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
    715  1.14  christos     return false;
    716   1.3  christos 
    717   1.1     skrll   stub_sec = hsh->stub_sec;
    718   1.1     skrll 
    719   1.1     skrll   /* Make a note of the offset within the stubs for this entry.  */
    720   1.1     skrll   hsh->stub_offset = stub_sec->size;
    721   1.1     skrll   loc = stub_sec->contents + hsh->stub_offset;
    722   1.1     skrll 
    723   1.1     skrll   stub_bfd = stub_sec->owner;
    724   1.1     skrll 
    725   1.1     skrll   switch (hsh->stub_type)
    726   1.1     skrll     {
    727   1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_long_branch:
    728  1.14  christos       /* Fail if the target section could not be assigned to an output
    729  1.14  christos 	 section.  The user should fix his linker script.  */
    730  1.14  christos       if (hsh->target_section->output_section == NULL
    731  1.14  christos 	  && info->non_contiguous_regions)
    732  1.15  christos 	info->callbacks->einfo (_("%F%P: Could not assign `%pA' to an output "
    733  1.14  christos 				  "section. Retry without "
    734  1.14  christos 				  "--enable-non-contiguous-regions.\n"),
    735  1.14  christos 				hsh->target_section);
    736  1.14  christos 
    737   1.1     skrll       /* Create the long branch.  A long branch is formed with "ldil"
    738   1.1     skrll 	 loading the upper bits of the target address into a register,
    739   1.1     skrll 	 then branching with "be" which adds in the lower bits.
    740   1.1     skrll 	 The "be" has its delay slot nullified.  */
    741   1.1     skrll       sym_value = (hsh->target_value
    742   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_offset
    743   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_section->vma);
    744   1.1     skrll 
    745   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, 0, e_lrsel);
    746   1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) LDIL_R1, val, 21);
    747   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc);
    748   1.1     skrll 
    749   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, 0, e_rrsel) >> 2;
    750   1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) BE_SR4_R1, val, 17);
    751   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 4);
    752   1.1     skrll 
    753  1.13  christos       size = LONG_BRANCH_STUB_SIZE;
    754   1.1     skrll       break;
    755   1.1     skrll 
    756   1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_long_branch_shared:
    757  1.14  christos       /* Fail if the target section could not be assigned to an output
    758  1.14  christos 	 section.  The user should fix his linker script.  */
    759  1.14  christos       if (hsh->target_section->output_section == NULL
    760  1.14  christos 	  && info->non_contiguous_regions)
    761  1.15  christos 	info->callbacks->einfo (_("%F%P: Could not assign `%pA' to an output "
    762  1.14  christos 				  "section. Retry without "
    763  1.14  christos 				  "--enable-non-contiguous-regions.\n"),
    764  1.14  christos 				hsh->target_section);
    765  1.14  christos 
    766   1.1     skrll       /* Branches are relative.  This is where we are going to.  */
    767   1.1     skrll       sym_value = (hsh->target_value
    768   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_offset
    769   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_section->vma);
    770   1.1     skrll 
    771   1.1     skrll       /* And this is where we are coming from, more or less.  */
    772   1.1     skrll       sym_value -= (hsh->stub_offset
    773   1.1     skrll 		    + stub_sec->output_offset
    774   1.1     skrll 		    + stub_sec->output_section->vma);
    775   1.1     skrll 
    776   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) BL_R1, loc);
    777   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, (bfd_signed_vma) -8, e_lrsel);
    778   1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) ADDIL_R1, val, 21);
    779   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 4);
    780   1.1     skrll 
    781   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, (bfd_signed_vma) -8, e_rrsel) >> 2;
    782   1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) BE_SR4_R1, val, 17);
    783   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 8);
    784  1.13  christos       size = LONG_BRANCH_SHARED_STUB_SIZE;
    785   1.1     skrll       break;
    786   1.1     skrll 
    787   1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_import:
    788   1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_import_shared:
    789   1.1     skrll       off = hsh->hh->eh.plt.offset;
    790   1.1     skrll       if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2)
    791   1.1     skrll 	abort ();
    792   1.1     skrll 
    793   1.1     skrll       off &= ~ (bfd_vma) 1;
    794   1.1     skrll       sym_value = (off
    795  1.11  christos 		   + htab->etab.splt->output_offset
    796  1.11  christos 		   + htab->etab.splt->output_section->vma
    797  1.11  christos 		   - elf_gp (htab->etab.splt->output_section->owner));
    798   1.1     skrll 
    799   1.1     skrll       insn = ADDIL_DP;
    800   1.1     skrll #if R19_STUBS
    801   1.1     skrll       if (hsh->stub_type == hppa_stub_import_shared)
    802   1.1     skrll 	insn = ADDIL_R19;
    803   1.1     skrll #endif
    804  1.13  christos 
    805  1.13  christos       /* Load function descriptor address into register %r22.  It is
    806  1.13  christos 	 sometimes needed for lazy binding.  */
    807   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, 0, e_lrsel),
    808   1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) insn, val, 21);
    809   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc);
    810   1.1     skrll 
    811   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, 0, e_rrsel);
    812  1.13  christos       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) LDO_R1_R22, val, 14);
    813   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 4);
    814   1.1     skrll 
    815  1.13  christos       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) LDW_R22_R21, loc + 8);
    816  1.13  christos 
    817   1.1     skrll       if (htab->multi_subspace)
    818   1.1     skrll 	{
    819   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) LDSID_R21_R1, loc + 12);
    820  1.13  christos 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) LDW_R22_R19,  loc + 16);
    821  1.13  christos 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) MTSP_R1,      loc + 20);
    822  1.13  christos 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) BE_SR0_R21,   loc + 24);
    823  1.13  christos 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) STW_RP,       loc + 28);
    824   1.1     skrll 
    825  1.13  christos 	  size = IMPORT_SHARED_STUB_SIZE;
    826   1.1     skrll 	}
    827   1.1     skrll       else
    828   1.1     skrll 	{
    829  1.13  christos 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) BV_R0_R21, loc + 12);
    830  1.13  christos 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) LDW_R22_R19, loc + 16);
    831   1.1     skrll 
    832  1.13  christos 	  size = IMPORT_STUB_SIZE;
    833   1.1     skrll 	}
    834   1.1     skrll 
    835   1.1     skrll       break;
    836   1.1     skrll 
    837   1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_export:
    838  1.14  christos       /* Fail if the target section could not be assigned to an output
    839  1.14  christos 	 section.  The user should fix his linker script.  */
    840  1.14  christos       if (hsh->target_section->output_section == NULL
    841  1.14  christos 	  && info->non_contiguous_regions)
    842  1.15  christos 	info->callbacks->einfo (_("%F%P: Could not assign `%pA' to an output "
    843  1.14  christos 				  "section. Retry without "
    844  1.14  christos 				  "--enable-non-contiguous-regions.\n"),
    845  1.14  christos 				hsh->target_section);
    846  1.14  christos 
    847   1.1     skrll       /* Branches are relative.  This is where we are going to.  */
    848   1.1     skrll       sym_value = (hsh->target_value
    849   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_offset
    850   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_section->vma);
    851   1.1     skrll 
    852   1.1     skrll       /* And this is where we are coming from.  */
    853   1.1     skrll       sym_value -= (hsh->stub_offset
    854   1.1     skrll 		    + stub_sec->output_offset
    855   1.1     skrll 		    + stub_sec->output_section->vma);
    856   1.1     skrll 
    857   1.1     skrll       if (sym_value - 8 + (1 << (17 + 1)) >= (1 << (17 + 2))
    858   1.1     skrll 	  && (!htab->has_22bit_branch
    859   1.1     skrll 	      || sym_value - 8 + (1 << (22 + 1)) >= (1 << (22 + 2))))
    860   1.1     skrll 	{
    861  1.11  christos 	  _bfd_error_handler
    862  1.11  christos 	    /* xgettext:c-format */
    863  1.12  christos 	    (_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): "
    864  1.12  christos 	       "cannot reach %s, recompile with -ffunction-sections"),
    865   1.1     skrll 	     hsh->target_section->owner,
    866   1.1     skrll 	     stub_sec,
    867  1.12  christos 	     (uint64_t) hsh->stub_offset,
    868   1.1     skrll 	     hsh->bh_root.string);
    869   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
    870  1.14  christos 	  return false;
    871   1.1     skrll 	}
    872   1.1     skrll 
    873   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, (bfd_signed_vma) -8, e_fsel) >> 2;
    874   1.1     skrll       if (!htab->has_22bit_branch)
    875   1.1     skrll 	insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) BL_RP, val, 17);
    876   1.1     skrll       else
    877   1.1     skrll 	insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) BL22_RP, val, 22);
    878   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc);
    879   1.1     skrll 
    880  1.11  christos       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) NOP,	   loc + 4);
    881   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) LDW_RP,      loc + 8);
    882   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) LDSID_RP_R1, loc + 12);
    883   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) MTSP_R1,     loc + 16);
    884   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) BE_SR0_RP,   loc + 20);
    885   1.1     skrll 
    886   1.1     skrll       /* Point the function symbol at the stub.  */
    887   1.1     skrll       hsh->hh->eh.root.u.def.section = stub_sec;
    888   1.1     skrll       hsh->hh->eh.root.u.def.value = stub_sec->size;
    889   1.1     skrll 
    890  1.13  christos       size = EXPORT_STUB_SIZE;
    891   1.1     skrll       break;
    892   1.1     skrll 
    893   1.1     skrll     default:
    894   1.1     skrll       BFD_FAIL ();
    895  1.14  christos       return false;
    896   1.1     skrll     }
    897   1.1     skrll 
    898   1.1     skrll   stub_sec->size += size;
    899  1.14  christos   return true;
    900   1.1     skrll }
    901   1.1     skrll 
    902   1.1     skrll #undef LDIL_R1
    903   1.1     skrll #undef BE_SR4_R1
    904   1.1     skrll #undef BL_R1
    905   1.1     skrll #undef ADDIL_R1
    906   1.1     skrll #undef DEPI_R1
    907   1.1     skrll #undef LDW_R1_R21
    908   1.1     skrll #undef LDW_R1_DLT
    909   1.1     skrll #undef LDW_R1_R19
    910   1.1     skrll #undef ADDIL_R19
    911   1.1     skrll #undef LDW_R1_DP
    912   1.1     skrll #undef LDSID_R21_R1
    913   1.1     skrll #undef MTSP_R1
    914   1.1     skrll #undef BE_SR0_R21
    915   1.1     skrll #undef STW_RP
    916   1.1     skrll #undef BV_R0_R21
    917   1.1     skrll #undef BL_RP
    918   1.1     skrll #undef NOP
    919   1.1     skrll #undef LDW_RP
    920   1.1     skrll #undef LDSID_RP_R1
    921   1.1     skrll #undef BE_SR0_RP
    922   1.1     skrll 
    923   1.1     skrll /* As above, but don't actually build the stub.  Just bump offset so
    924   1.1     skrll    we know stub section sizes.  */
    925   1.1     skrll 
    926  1.14  christos static bool
    927   1.1     skrll hppa_size_one_stub (struct bfd_hash_entry *bh, void *in_arg)
    928   1.1     skrll {
    929   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
    930   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
    931   1.1     skrll   int size;
    932   1.1     skrll 
    933   1.1     skrll   /* Massage our args to the form they really have.  */
    934   1.1     skrll   hsh = hppa_stub_hash_entry (bh);
    935   1.1     skrll   htab = in_arg;
    936   1.1     skrll 
    937   1.1     skrll   if (hsh->stub_type == hppa_stub_long_branch)
    938  1.13  christos     size = LONG_BRANCH_STUB_SIZE;
    939   1.1     skrll   else if (hsh->stub_type == hppa_stub_long_branch_shared)
    940  1.13  christos     size = LONG_BRANCH_SHARED_STUB_SIZE;
    941   1.1     skrll   else if (hsh->stub_type == hppa_stub_export)
    942  1.13  christos     size = EXPORT_STUB_SIZE;
    943   1.1     skrll   else /* hppa_stub_import or hppa_stub_import_shared.  */
    944   1.1     skrll     {
    945   1.1     skrll       if (htab->multi_subspace)
    946  1.13  christos 	size = IMPORT_SHARED_STUB_SIZE;
    947   1.1     skrll       else
    948  1.13  christos 	size = IMPORT_STUB_SIZE;
    949   1.1     skrll     }
    950   1.1     skrll 
    951   1.1     skrll   hsh->stub_sec->size += size;
    952  1.14  christos   return true;
    953   1.1     skrll }
    954   1.1     skrll 
    955   1.1     skrll /* Return nonzero if ABFD represents an HPPA ELF32 file.
    956   1.1     skrll    Additionally we set the default architecture and machine.  */
    957   1.1     skrll 
    958  1.14  christos static bool
    959   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_object_p (bfd *abfd)
    960   1.1     skrll {
    961   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Ehdr * i_ehdrp;
    962   1.1     skrll   unsigned int flags;
    963   1.1     skrll 
    964   1.1     skrll   i_ehdrp = elf_elfheader (abfd);
    965   1.1     skrll   if (strcmp (bfd_get_target (abfd), "elf32-hppa-linux") == 0)
    966   1.1     skrll     {
    967   1.6  christos       /* GCC on hppa-linux produces binaries with OSABI=GNU,
    968   1.1     skrll 	 but the kernel produces corefiles with OSABI=SysV.  */
    969   1.6  christos       if (i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_GNU &&
    970   1.1     skrll 	  i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_NONE) /* aka SYSV */
    971  1.14  christos 	return false;
    972   1.1     skrll     }
    973   1.1     skrll   else if (strcmp (bfd_get_target (abfd), "elf32-hppa-netbsd") == 0)
    974   1.1     skrll     {
    975   1.1     skrll       /* GCC on hppa-netbsd produces binaries with OSABI=NetBSD,
    976   1.1     skrll 	 but the kernel produces corefiles with OSABI=SysV.  */
    977   1.1     skrll       if (i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_NETBSD &&
    978   1.1     skrll 	  i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_NONE) /* aka SYSV */
    979  1.14  christos 	return false;
    980   1.1     skrll     }
    981   1.1     skrll   else
    982   1.1     skrll     {
    983   1.1     skrll       if (i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_HPUX)
    984  1.14  christos 	return false;
    985   1.1     skrll     }
    986   1.1     skrll 
    987   1.1     skrll   flags = i_ehdrp->e_flags;
    988   1.1     skrll   switch (flags & (EF_PARISC_ARCH | EF_PARISC_WIDE))
    989   1.1     skrll     {
    990   1.1     skrll     case EFA_PARISC_1_0:
    991   1.1     skrll       return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_hppa, 10);
    992   1.1     skrll     case EFA_PARISC_1_1:
    993   1.1     skrll       return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_hppa, 11);
    994   1.1     skrll     case EFA_PARISC_2_0:
    995   1.1     skrll       return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_hppa, 20);
    996   1.1     skrll     case EFA_PARISC_2_0 | EF_PARISC_WIDE:
    997   1.1     skrll       return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_hppa, 25);
    998   1.1     skrll     }
    999  1.14  christos   return true;
   1000   1.1     skrll }
   1001   1.1     skrll 
   1002   1.1     skrll /* Create the .plt and .got sections, and set up our hash table
   1003   1.1     skrll    short-cuts to various dynamic sections.  */
   1004   1.1     skrll 
   1005  1.14  christos static bool
   1006   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_create_dynamic_sections (bfd *abfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   1007   1.1     skrll {
   1008   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   1009   1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh;
   1010   1.1     skrll 
   1011   1.1     skrll   /* Don't try to create the .plt and .got twice.  */
   1012   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   1013   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1014  1.14  christos     return false;
   1015  1.11  christos   if (htab->etab.splt != NULL)
   1016  1.14  christos     return true;
   1017   1.1     skrll 
   1018   1.1     skrll   /* Call the generic code to do most of the work.  */
   1019   1.1     skrll   if (! _bfd_elf_create_dynamic_sections (abfd, info))
   1020  1.14  christos     return false;
   1021   1.1     skrll 
   1022   1.1     skrll   /* hppa-linux needs _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ to be visible from the main
   1023   1.1     skrll      application, because __canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare needs it.  */
   1024   1.1     skrll   eh = elf_hash_table (info)->hgot;
   1025   1.1     skrll   eh->forced_local = 0;
   1026   1.1     skrll   eh->other = STV_DEFAULT;
   1027   1.1     skrll   return bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, eh);
   1028   1.1     skrll }
   1029   1.1     skrll 
   1030   1.1     skrll /* Copy the extra info we tack onto an elf_link_hash_entry.  */
   1031   1.1     skrll 
   1032   1.1     skrll static void
   1033   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_copy_indirect_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1034   1.1     skrll 				 struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh_dir,
   1035   1.1     skrll 				 struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh_ind)
   1036   1.1     skrll {
   1037   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh_dir, *hh_ind;
   1038   1.1     skrll 
   1039   1.1     skrll   hh_dir = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh_dir);
   1040   1.1     skrll   hh_ind = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh_ind);
   1041   1.1     skrll 
   1042  1.11  christos   if (eh_ind->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect)
   1043   1.1     skrll     {
   1044  1.11  christos       hh_dir->plabel |= hh_ind->plabel;
   1045  1.11  christos       hh_dir->tls_type |= hh_ind->tls_type;
   1046  1.11  christos       hh_ind->tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
   1047   1.1     skrll     }
   1048   1.1     skrll 
   1049  1.11  christos   _bfd_elf_link_hash_copy_indirect (info, eh_dir, eh_ind);
   1050   1.1     skrll }
   1051   1.1     skrll 
   1052   1.1     skrll static int
   1053   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_optimized_tls_reloc (struct bfd_link_info *info ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   1054   1.1     skrll 				int r_type, int is_local ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
   1055   1.1     skrll {
   1056   1.1     skrll   /* For now we don't support linker optimizations.  */
   1057   1.1     skrll   return r_type;
   1058   1.1     skrll }
   1059   1.1     skrll 
   1060   1.3  christos /* Return a pointer to the local GOT, PLT and TLS reference counts
   1061   1.3  christos    for ABFD.  Returns NULL if the storage allocation fails.  */
   1062   1.3  christos 
   1063   1.3  christos static bfd_signed_vma *
   1064   1.3  christos hppa32_elf_local_refcounts (bfd *abfd)
   1065   1.3  christos {
   1066   1.3  christos   Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (abfd)->symtab_hdr;
   1067   1.3  christos   bfd_signed_vma *local_refcounts;
   1068   1.7  christos 
   1069   1.3  christos   local_refcounts = elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd);
   1070   1.3  christos   if (local_refcounts == NULL)
   1071   1.3  christos     {
   1072   1.3  christos       bfd_size_type size;
   1073   1.3  christos 
   1074   1.3  christos       /* Allocate space for local GOT and PLT reference
   1075   1.3  christos 	 counts.  Done this way to save polluting elf_obj_tdata
   1076   1.3  christos 	 with another target specific pointer.  */
   1077   1.3  christos       size = symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   1078   1.3  christos       size *= 2 * sizeof (bfd_signed_vma);
   1079   1.3  christos       /* Add in space to store the local GOT TLS types.  */
   1080   1.3  christos       size += symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   1081   1.3  christos       local_refcounts = bfd_zalloc (abfd, size);
   1082   1.3  christos       if (local_refcounts == NULL)
   1083   1.3  christos 	return NULL;
   1084   1.3  christos       elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd) = local_refcounts;
   1085   1.3  christos       memset (hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type (abfd), GOT_UNKNOWN,
   1086   1.3  christos 	      symtab_hdr->sh_info);
   1087   1.3  christos     }
   1088   1.3  christos   return local_refcounts;
   1089   1.3  christos }
   1090   1.3  christos 
   1091   1.3  christos 
   1092   1.1     skrll /* Look through the relocs for a section during the first phase, and
   1093   1.1     skrll    calculate needed space in the global offset table, procedure linkage
   1094   1.1     skrll    table, and dynamic reloc sections.  At this point we haven't
   1095   1.1     skrll    necessarily read all the input files.  */
   1096   1.1     skrll 
   1097  1.14  christos static bool
   1098   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_check_relocs (bfd *abfd,
   1099   1.1     skrll 			 struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1100   1.1     skrll 			 asection *sec,
   1101   1.1     skrll 			 const Elf_Internal_Rela *relocs)
   1102   1.1     skrll {
   1103   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   1104   1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry **eh_syms;
   1105   1.1     skrll   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela;
   1106   1.1     skrll   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela_end;
   1107   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   1108   1.1     skrll   asection *sreloc;
   1109   1.1     skrll 
   1110   1.7  christos   if (bfd_link_relocatable (info))
   1111  1.14  christos     return true;
   1112   1.1     skrll 
   1113   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   1114   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1115  1.14  christos     return false;
   1116   1.1     skrll   symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (abfd)->symtab_hdr;
   1117   1.1     skrll   eh_syms = elf_sym_hashes (abfd);
   1118   1.1     skrll   sreloc = NULL;
   1119   1.1     skrll 
   1120   1.1     skrll   rela_end = relocs + sec->reloc_count;
   1121   1.1     skrll   for (rela = relocs; rela < rela_end; rela++)
   1122   1.1     skrll     {
   1123   1.1     skrll       enum {
   1124   1.1     skrll 	NEED_GOT = 1,
   1125   1.1     skrll 	NEED_PLT = 2,
   1126   1.1     skrll 	NEED_DYNREL = 4,
   1127   1.1     skrll 	PLT_PLABEL = 8
   1128   1.1     skrll       };
   1129   1.1     skrll 
   1130   1.1     skrll       unsigned int r_symndx, r_type;
   1131   1.1     skrll       struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   1132   1.1     skrll       int need_entry = 0;
   1133   1.1     skrll 
   1134   1.1     skrll       r_symndx = ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info);
   1135   1.1     skrll 
   1136   1.1     skrll       if (r_symndx < symtab_hdr->sh_info)
   1137   1.1     skrll 	hh = NULL;
   1138   1.1     skrll       else
   1139   1.1     skrll 	{
   1140   1.1     skrll 	  hh =  hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh_syms[r_symndx - symtab_hdr->sh_info]);
   1141   1.1     skrll 	  while (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
   1142   1.1     skrll 		 || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   1143   1.1     skrll 	    hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (hh->eh.root.u.i.link);
   1144   1.1     skrll 	}
   1145   1.1     skrll 
   1146   1.1     skrll       r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info);
   1147   1.1     skrll       r_type = elf32_hppa_optimized_tls_reloc (info, r_type, hh == NULL);
   1148   1.1     skrll 
   1149   1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
   1150   1.1     skrll 	{
   1151   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   1152   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   1153   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   1154   1.1     skrll 	  /* This symbol requires a global offset table entry.  */
   1155   1.1     skrll 	  need_entry = NEED_GOT;
   1156   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1157   1.1     skrll 
   1158   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL14R: /* "Official" procedure labels.  */
   1159   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL21L:
   1160   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL32:
   1161   1.1     skrll 	  /* If the addend is non-zero, we break badly.  */
   1162   1.1     skrll 	  if (rela->r_addend != 0)
   1163   1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   1164   1.1     skrll 
   1165   1.1     skrll 	  /* If we are creating a shared library, then we need to
   1166   1.1     skrll 	     create a PLT entry for all PLABELs, because PLABELs with
   1167   1.1     skrll 	     local symbols may be passed via a pointer to another
   1168   1.1     skrll 	     object.  Additionally, output a dynamic relocation
   1169   1.1     skrll 	     pointing to the PLT entry.
   1170   1.1     skrll 
   1171   1.1     skrll 	     For executables, the original 32-bit ABI allowed two
   1172   1.1     skrll 	     different styles of PLABELs (function pointers):  For
   1173   1.1     skrll 	     global functions, the PLABEL word points into the .plt
   1174   1.1     skrll 	     two bytes past a (function address, gp) pair, and for
   1175   1.1     skrll 	     local functions the PLABEL points directly at the
   1176   1.1     skrll 	     function.  The magic +2 for the first type allows us to
   1177   1.1     skrll 	     differentiate between the two.  As you can imagine, this
   1178   1.1     skrll 	     is a real pain when it comes to generating code to call
   1179   1.1     skrll 	     functions indirectly or to compare function pointers.
   1180   1.1     skrll 	     We avoid the mess by always pointing a PLABEL into the
   1181   1.1     skrll 	     .plt, even for local functions.  */
   1182  1.11  christos 	  need_entry = PLT_PLABEL | NEED_PLT;
   1183  1.11  christos 	  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1184  1.11  christos 	    need_entry |= NEED_DYNREL;
   1185   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1186   1.1     skrll 
   1187   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL12F:
   1188   1.1     skrll 	  htab->has_12bit_branch = 1;
   1189   1.1     skrll 	  goto branch_common;
   1190   1.1     skrll 
   1191   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL17C:
   1192   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL17F:
   1193   1.1     skrll 	  htab->has_17bit_branch = 1;
   1194   1.1     skrll 	  goto branch_common;
   1195   1.1     skrll 
   1196   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL22F:
   1197   1.1     skrll 	  htab->has_22bit_branch = 1;
   1198   1.1     skrll 	branch_common:
   1199   1.1     skrll 	  /* Function calls might need to go through the .plt, and
   1200   1.1     skrll 	     might require long branch stubs.  */
   1201   1.1     skrll 	  if (hh == NULL)
   1202   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1203   1.1     skrll 	      /* We know local syms won't need a .plt entry, and if
   1204   1.1     skrll 		 they need a long branch stub we can't guarantee that
   1205   1.1     skrll 		 we can reach the stub.  So just flag an error later
   1206   1.1     skrll 		 if we're doing a shared link and find we need a long
   1207   1.1     skrll 		 branch stub.  */
   1208   1.1     skrll 	      continue;
   1209   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1210   1.1     skrll 	  else
   1211   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1212   1.1     skrll 	      /* Global symbols will need a .plt entry if they remain
   1213   1.1     skrll 		 global, and in most cases won't need a long branch
   1214   1.1     skrll 		 stub.  Unfortunately, we have to cater for the case
   1215   1.1     skrll 		 where a symbol is forced local by versioning, or due
   1216   1.1     skrll 		 to symbolic linking, and we lose the .plt entry.  */
   1217   1.1     skrll 	      need_entry = NEED_PLT;
   1218   1.1     skrll 	      if (hh->eh.type == STT_PARISC_MILLI)
   1219   1.1     skrll 		need_entry = 0;
   1220   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1221   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1222   1.1     skrll 
   1223   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_SEGBASE:  /* Used to set segment base.  */
   1224   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_SEGREL32: /* Relative reloc, used for unwind.  */
   1225   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL14F: /* PC relative load/store.  */
   1226   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL14R:
   1227   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL17R: /* External branches.  */
   1228   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL21L: /* As above, and for load/store too.  */
   1229   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL32:
   1230   1.1     skrll 	  /* We don't need to propagate the relocation if linking a
   1231   1.1     skrll 	     shared object since these are section relative.  */
   1232   1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   1233   1.1     skrll 
   1234   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL14F: /* Used for gp rel data load/store.  */
   1235   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL14R:
   1236   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL21L:
   1237   1.7  christos 	  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1238   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1239  1.11  christos 	      _bfd_error_handler
   1240  1.11  christos 		/* xgettext:c-format */
   1241  1.12  christos 		(_("%pB: relocation %s can not be used when making a shared object; recompile with -fPIC"),
   1242   1.1     skrll 		 abfd,
   1243   1.1     skrll 		 elf_hppa_howto_table[r_type].name);
   1244   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   1245  1.14  christos 	      return false;
   1246   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1247   1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through.  */
   1248   1.1     skrll 
   1249   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR17F: /* Used for external branches.  */
   1250   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR17R:
   1251   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR14F: /* Used for load/store from absolute locn.  */
   1252   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR14R:
   1253   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR21L: /* As above, and for ext branches too.  */
   1254   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR32: /* .word relocs.  */
   1255   1.1     skrll 	  /* We may want to output a dynamic relocation later.  */
   1256   1.1     skrll 	  need_entry = NEED_DYNREL;
   1257   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1258   1.1     skrll 
   1259   1.1     skrll 	  /* This relocation describes the C++ object vtable hierarchy.
   1260   1.1     skrll 	     Reconstruct it for later use during GC.  */
   1261   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_GNU_VTINHERIT:
   1262   1.1     skrll 	  if (!bfd_elf_gc_record_vtinherit (abfd, sec, &hh->eh, rela->r_offset))
   1263  1.14  christos 	    return false;
   1264   1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   1265   1.1     skrll 
   1266   1.1     skrll 	  /* This relocation describes which C++ vtable entries are actually
   1267   1.1     skrll 	     used.  Record for later use during GC.  */
   1268   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_GNU_VTENTRY:
   1269  1.13  christos 	  if (!bfd_elf_gc_record_vtentry (abfd, sec, &hh->eh, rela->r_addend))
   1270  1.14  christos 	    return false;
   1271   1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   1272   1.1     skrll 
   1273   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   1274   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   1275   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   1276   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   1277   1.1     skrll 	  need_entry = NEED_GOT;
   1278   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1279   1.1     skrll 
   1280   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   1281   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   1282  1.11  christos 	  if (bfd_link_dll (info))
   1283  1.11  christos 	    info->flags |= DF_STATIC_TLS;
   1284   1.1     skrll 	  need_entry = NEED_GOT;
   1285   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1286   1.1     skrll 
   1287   1.1     skrll 	default:
   1288   1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   1289   1.1     skrll 	}
   1290   1.1     skrll 
   1291   1.1     skrll       /* Now carry out our orders.  */
   1292   1.1     skrll       if (need_entry & NEED_GOT)
   1293   1.1     skrll 	{
   1294  1.11  christos 	  int tls_type = GOT_NORMAL;
   1295  1.11  christos 
   1296   1.1     skrll 	  switch (r_type)
   1297   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1298   1.1     skrll 	    default:
   1299   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1300   1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   1301   1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   1302  1.11  christos 	      tls_type = GOT_TLS_GD;
   1303   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1304   1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   1305   1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   1306  1.11  christos 	      tls_type = GOT_TLS_LDM;
   1307   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1308   1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   1309   1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   1310  1.11  christos 	      tls_type = GOT_TLS_IE;
   1311   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1312   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1313   1.1     skrll 
   1314   1.1     skrll 	  /* Allocate space for a GOT entry, as well as a dynamic
   1315   1.1     skrll 	     relocation for this entry.  */
   1316  1.11  christos 	  if (htab->etab.sgot == NULL)
   1317   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1318   1.1     skrll 	      if (!elf32_hppa_create_dynamic_sections (htab->etab.dynobj, info))
   1319  1.14  christos 		return false;
   1320   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1321   1.1     skrll 
   1322  1.11  christos 	  if (hh != NULL)
   1323  1.11  christos 	    {
   1324  1.11  christos 	      if (tls_type == GOT_TLS_LDM)
   1325  1.11  christos 		htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount += 1;
   1326  1.11  christos 	      else
   1327  1.11  christos 		hh->eh.got.refcount += 1;
   1328  1.11  christos 	      hh->tls_type |= tls_type;
   1329  1.11  christos 	    }
   1330   1.1     skrll 	  else
   1331   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1332  1.11  christos 	      bfd_signed_vma *local_got_refcounts;
   1333  1.11  christos 
   1334  1.11  christos 	      /* This is a global offset table entry for a local symbol.  */
   1335  1.11  christos 	      local_got_refcounts = hppa32_elf_local_refcounts (abfd);
   1336  1.11  christos 	      if (local_got_refcounts == NULL)
   1337  1.14  christos 		return false;
   1338  1.11  christos 	      if (tls_type == GOT_TLS_LDM)
   1339  1.11  christos 		htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount += 1;
   1340   1.1     skrll 	      else
   1341  1.11  christos 		local_got_refcounts[r_symndx] += 1;
   1342   1.1     skrll 
   1343  1.11  christos 	      hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type (abfd) [r_symndx] |= tls_type;
   1344   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1345   1.1     skrll 	}
   1346   1.1     skrll 
   1347   1.1     skrll       if (need_entry & NEED_PLT)
   1348   1.1     skrll 	{
   1349   1.1     skrll 	  /* If we are creating a shared library, and this is a reloc
   1350   1.1     skrll 	     against a weak symbol or a global symbol in a dynamic
   1351   1.1     skrll 	     object, then we will be creating an import stub and a
   1352   1.1     skrll 	     .plt entry for the symbol.  Similarly, on a normal link
   1353   1.1     skrll 	     to symbols defined in a dynamic object we'll need the
   1354   1.1     skrll 	     import stub and a .plt entry.  We don't know yet whether
   1355   1.1     skrll 	     the symbol is defined or not, so make an entry anyway and
   1356   1.1     skrll 	     clean up later in adjust_dynamic_symbol.  */
   1357   1.1     skrll 	  if ((sec->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0)
   1358   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1359   1.1     skrll 	      if (hh != NULL)
   1360   1.1     skrll 		{
   1361   1.1     skrll 		  hh->eh.needs_plt = 1;
   1362   1.1     skrll 		  hh->eh.plt.refcount += 1;
   1363   1.1     skrll 
   1364   1.1     skrll 		  /* If this .plt entry is for a plabel, mark it so
   1365   1.1     skrll 		     that adjust_dynamic_symbol will keep the entry
   1366   1.1     skrll 		     even if it appears to be local.  */
   1367   1.1     skrll 		  if (need_entry & PLT_PLABEL)
   1368   1.1     skrll 		    hh->plabel = 1;
   1369   1.1     skrll 		}
   1370   1.1     skrll 	      else if (need_entry & PLT_PLABEL)
   1371   1.1     skrll 		{
   1372   1.1     skrll 		  bfd_signed_vma *local_got_refcounts;
   1373   1.1     skrll 		  bfd_signed_vma *local_plt_refcounts;
   1374   1.1     skrll 
   1375   1.3  christos 		  local_got_refcounts = hppa32_elf_local_refcounts (abfd);
   1376   1.1     skrll 		  if (local_got_refcounts == NULL)
   1377  1.14  christos 		    return false;
   1378   1.1     skrll 		  local_plt_refcounts = (local_got_refcounts
   1379   1.1     skrll 					 + symtab_hdr->sh_info);
   1380   1.1     skrll 		  local_plt_refcounts[r_symndx] += 1;
   1381   1.1     skrll 		}
   1382   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1383   1.1     skrll 	}
   1384   1.1     skrll 
   1385  1.11  christos       if ((need_entry & NEED_DYNREL) != 0
   1386  1.11  christos 	  && (sec->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0)
   1387   1.1     skrll 	{
   1388   1.1     skrll 	  /* Flag this symbol as having a non-got, non-plt reference
   1389   1.1     skrll 	     so that we generate copy relocs if it turns out to be
   1390   1.1     skrll 	     dynamic.  */
   1391  1.11  christos 	  if (hh != NULL)
   1392   1.1     skrll 	    hh->eh.non_got_ref = 1;
   1393   1.1     skrll 
   1394   1.1     skrll 	  /* If we are creating a shared library then we need to copy
   1395   1.1     skrll 	     the reloc into the shared library.  However, if we are
   1396   1.1     skrll 	     linking with -Bsymbolic, we need only copy absolute
   1397   1.1     skrll 	     relocs or relocs against symbols that are not defined in
   1398   1.1     skrll 	     an object we are including in the link.  PC- or DP- or
   1399   1.1     skrll 	     DLT-relative relocs against any local sym or global sym
   1400   1.1     skrll 	     with DEF_REGULAR set, can be discarded.  At this point we
   1401   1.1     skrll 	     have not seen all the input files, so it is possible that
   1402   1.1     skrll 	     DEF_REGULAR is not set now but will be set later (it is
   1403   1.1     skrll 	     never cleared).  We account for that possibility below by
   1404   1.1     skrll 	     storing information in the dyn_relocs field of the
   1405   1.1     skrll 	     hash table entry.
   1406   1.1     skrll 
   1407   1.1     skrll 	     A similar situation to the -Bsymbolic case occurs when
   1408   1.1     skrll 	     creating shared libraries and symbol visibility changes
   1409   1.1     skrll 	     render the symbol local.
   1410   1.1     skrll 
   1411   1.1     skrll 	     As it turns out, all the relocs we will be creating here
   1412   1.1     skrll 	     are absolute, so we cannot remove them on -Bsymbolic
   1413   1.1     skrll 	     links or visibility changes anyway.  A STUB_REL reloc
   1414   1.1     skrll 	     is absolute too, as in that case it is the reloc in the
   1415   1.1     skrll 	     stub we will be creating, rather than copying the PCREL
   1416   1.1     skrll 	     reloc in the branch.
   1417   1.1     skrll 
   1418   1.1     skrll 	     If on the other hand, we are creating an executable, we
   1419   1.1     skrll 	     may need to keep relocations for symbols satisfied by a
   1420   1.1     skrll 	     dynamic library if we manage to avoid copy relocs for the
   1421   1.1     skrll 	     symbol.  */
   1422   1.7  christos 	  if ((bfd_link_pic (info)
   1423   1.1     skrll 	       && (IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC (r_type)
   1424   1.1     skrll 		   || (hh != NULL
   1425   1.7  christos 		       && (!SYMBOLIC_BIND (info, &hh->eh)
   1426   1.1     skrll 			   || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak
   1427   1.1     skrll 			   || !hh->eh.def_regular))))
   1428   1.1     skrll 	      || (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
   1429   1.7  christos 		  && !bfd_link_pic (info)
   1430   1.1     skrll 		  && hh != NULL
   1431   1.1     skrll 		  && (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak
   1432   1.1     skrll 		      || !hh->eh.def_regular)))
   1433   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1434  1.11  christos 	      struct elf_dyn_relocs *hdh_p;
   1435  1.11  christos 	      struct elf_dyn_relocs **hdh_head;
   1436   1.1     skrll 
   1437   1.1     skrll 	      /* Create a reloc section in dynobj and make room for
   1438   1.1     skrll 		 this reloc.  */
   1439   1.1     skrll 	      if (sreloc == NULL)
   1440   1.1     skrll 		{
   1441   1.3  christos 		  sreloc = _bfd_elf_make_dynamic_reloc_section
   1442  1.14  christos 		    (sec, htab->etab.dynobj, 2, abfd, /*rela?*/ true);
   1443   1.3  christos 
   1444   1.1     skrll 		  if (sreloc == NULL)
   1445   1.1     skrll 		    {
   1446   1.3  christos 		      bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   1447  1.14  christos 		      return false;
   1448   1.1     skrll 		    }
   1449   1.1     skrll 		}
   1450   1.1     skrll 
   1451   1.1     skrll 	      /* If this is a global symbol, we count the number of
   1452   1.1     skrll 		 relocations we need for this symbol.  */
   1453   1.1     skrll 	      if (hh != NULL)
   1454   1.1     skrll 		{
   1455  1.14  christos 		  hdh_head = &hh->eh.dyn_relocs;
   1456   1.1     skrll 		}
   1457   1.1     skrll 	      else
   1458   1.1     skrll 		{
   1459   1.1     skrll 		  /* Track dynamic relocs needed for local syms too.
   1460   1.1     skrll 		     We really need local syms available to do this
   1461   1.1     skrll 		     easily.  Oh well.  */
   1462   1.1     skrll 		  asection *sr;
   1463   1.1     skrll 		  void *vpp;
   1464   1.3  christos 		  Elf_Internal_Sym *isym;
   1465   1.3  christos 
   1466  1.14  christos 		  isym = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->etab.sym_cache,
   1467   1.3  christos 						abfd, r_symndx);
   1468   1.3  christos 		  if (isym == NULL)
   1469  1.14  christos 		    return false;
   1470   1.1     skrll 
   1471   1.3  christos 		  sr = bfd_section_from_elf_index (abfd, isym->st_shndx);
   1472   1.1     skrll 		  if (sr == NULL)
   1473   1.3  christos 		    sr = sec;
   1474   1.1     skrll 
   1475   1.1     skrll 		  vpp = &elf_section_data (sr)->local_dynrel;
   1476  1.11  christos 		  hdh_head = (struct elf_dyn_relocs **) vpp;
   1477   1.1     skrll 		}
   1478   1.1     skrll 
   1479   1.1     skrll 	      hdh_p = *hdh_head;
   1480   1.1     skrll 	      if (hdh_p == NULL || hdh_p->sec != sec)
   1481   1.1     skrll 		{
   1482   1.1     skrll 		  hdh_p = bfd_alloc (htab->etab.dynobj, sizeof *hdh_p);
   1483   1.1     skrll 		  if (hdh_p == NULL)
   1484  1.14  christos 		    return false;
   1485  1.11  christos 		  hdh_p->next = *hdh_head;
   1486   1.1     skrll 		  *hdh_head = hdh_p;
   1487   1.1     skrll 		  hdh_p->sec = sec;
   1488   1.1     skrll 		  hdh_p->count = 0;
   1489   1.1     skrll #if RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
   1490  1.11  christos 		  hdh_p->pc_count = 0;
   1491   1.1     skrll #endif
   1492   1.1     skrll 		}
   1493   1.1     skrll 
   1494   1.1     skrll 	      hdh_p->count += 1;
   1495   1.1     skrll #if RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
   1496   1.1     skrll 	      if (!IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC (rtype))
   1497  1.11  christos 		hdh_p->pc_count += 1;
   1498   1.1     skrll #endif
   1499   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1500   1.1     skrll 	}
   1501   1.1     skrll     }
   1502   1.1     skrll 
   1503  1.14  christos   return true;
   1504   1.1     skrll }
   1505   1.1     skrll 
   1506   1.1     skrll /* Return the section that should be marked against garbage collection
   1507   1.1     skrll    for a given relocation.  */
   1508   1.1     skrll 
   1509   1.1     skrll static asection *
   1510   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_gc_mark_hook (asection *sec,
   1511   1.1     skrll 			 struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1512   1.1     skrll 			 Elf_Internal_Rela *rela,
   1513   1.1     skrll 			 struct elf_link_hash_entry *hh,
   1514   1.1     skrll 			 Elf_Internal_Sym *sym)
   1515   1.1     skrll {
   1516   1.1     skrll   if (hh != NULL)
   1517   1.1     skrll     switch ((unsigned int) ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info))
   1518   1.1     skrll       {
   1519   1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_GNU_VTINHERIT:
   1520   1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_GNU_VTENTRY:
   1521   1.1     skrll 	return NULL;
   1522   1.1     skrll       }
   1523   1.1     skrll 
   1524   1.1     skrll   return _bfd_elf_gc_mark_hook (sec, info, rela, hh, sym);
   1525   1.1     skrll }
   1526   1.1     skrll 
   1527   1.1     skrll /* Support for core dump NOTE sections.  */
   1528   1.1     skrll 
   1529  1.14  christos static bool
   1530   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_grok_prstatus (bfd *abfd, Elf_Internal_Note *note)
   1531   1.1     skrll {
   1532   1.1     skrll   int offset;
   1533   1.1     skrll   size_t size;
   1534   1.1     skrll 
   1535   1.1     skrll   switch (note->descsz)
   1536   1.1     skrll     {
   1537   1.1     skrll       default:
   1538  1.14  christos 	return false;
   1539   1.1     skrll 
   1540   1.1     skrll       case 396:		/* Linux/hppa */
   1541   1.1     skrll 	/* pr_cursig */
   1542   1.7  christos 	elf_tdata (abfd)->core->signal = bfd_get_16 (abfd, note->descdata + 12);
   1543   1.1     skrll 
   1544   1.1     skrll 	/* pr_pid */
   1545   1.7  christos 	elf_tdata (abfd)->core->lwpid = bfd_get_32 (abfd, note->descdata + 24);
   1546   1.1     skrll 
   1547   1.1     skrll 	/* pr_reg */
   1548   1.1     skrll 	offset = 72;
   1549   1.1     skrll 	size = 320;
   1550   1.1     skrll 
   1551   1.1     skrll 	break;
   1552   1.1     skrll     }
   1553   1.1     skrll 
   1554   1.1     skrll   /* Make a ".reg/999" section.  */
   1555   1.1     skrll   return _bfd_elfcore_make_pseudosection (abfd, ".reg",
   1556   1.1     skrll 					  size, note->descpos + offset);
   1557   1.1     skrll }
   1558   1.1     skrll 
   1559  1.14  christos static bool
   1560   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_grok_psinfo (bfd *abfd, Elf_Internal_Note *note)
   1561   1.1     skrll {
   1562   1.1     skrll   switch (note->descsz)
   1563   1.1     skrll     {
   1564   1.1     skrll       default:
   1565  1.14  christos 	return false;
   1566   1.1     skrll 
   1567   1.1     skrll       case 124:		/* Linux/hppa elf_prpsinfo.  */
   1568   1.7  christos 	elf_tdata (abfd)->core->program
   1569   1.1     skrll 	  = _bfd_elfcore_strndup (abfd, note->descdata + 28, 16);
   1570   1.7  christos 	elf_tdata (abfd)->core->command
   1571   1.1     skrll 	  = _bfd_elfcore_strndup (abfd, note->descdata + 44, 80);
   1572   1.1     skrll     }
   1573   1.1     skrll 
   1574   1.1     skrll   /* Note that for some reason, a spurious space is tacked
   1575   1.1     skrll      onto the end of the args in some (at least one anyway)
   1576   1.1     skrll      implementations, so strip it off if it exists.  */
   1577   1.1     skrll   {
   1578   1.7  christos     char *command = elf_tdata (abfd)->core->command;
   1579   1.1     skrll     int n = strlen (command);
   1580   1.1     skrll 
   1581   1.1     skrll     if (0 < n && command[n - 1] == ' ')
   1582   1.1     skrll       command[n - 1] = '\0';
   1583   1.1     skrll   }
   1584   1.1     skrll 
   1585  1.14  christos   return true;
   1586   1.1     skrll }
   1587   1.1     skrll 
   1588   1.1     skrll /* Our own version of hide_symbol, so that we can keep plt entries for
   1589   1.1     skrll    plabels.  */
   1590   1.1     skrll 
   1591   1.1     skrll static void
   1592   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_hide_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1593   1.1     skrll 			struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh,
   1594  1.14  christos 			bool force_local)
   1595   1.1     skrll {
   1596   1.1     skrll   if (force_local)
   1597   1.1     skrll     {
   1598   1.1     skrll       eh->forced_local = 1;
   1599   1.1     skrll       if (eh->dynindx != -1)
   1600   1.1     skrll 	{
   1601   1.1     skrll 	  eh->dynindx = -1;
   1602   1.1     skrll 	  _bfd_elf_strtab_delref (elf_hash_table (info)->dynstr,
   1603   1.1     skrll 				  eh->dynstr_index);
   1604   1.1     skrll 	}
   1605   1.7  christos 
   1606   1.7  christos       /* PR 16082: Remove version information from hidden symbol.  */
   1607   1.7  christos       eh->verinfo.verdef = NULL;
   1608   1.7  christos       eh->verinfo.vertree = NULL;
   1609   1.1     skrll     }
   1610   1.1     skrll 
   1611   1.6  christos   /* STT_GNU_IFUNC symbol must go through PLT.  */
   1612   1.6  christos   if (! hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh)->plabel
   1613   1.6  christos       && eh->type != STT_GNU_IFUNC)
   1614   1.1     skrll     {
   1615   1.1     skrll       eh->needs_plt = 0;
   1616   1.6  christos       eh->plt = elf_hash_table (info)->init_plt_offset;
   1617   1.1     skrll     }
   1618   1.1     skrll }
   1619   1.1     skrll 
   1620  1.11  christos /* Return true if we have dynamic relocs against H or any of its weak
   1621  1.11  christos    aliases, that apply to read-only sections.  Cannot be used after
   1622  1.11  christos    size_dynamic_sections.  */
   1623  1.11  christos 
   1624  1.14  christos static bool
   1625  1.11  christos alias_readonly_dynrelocs (struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh)
   1626  1.11  christos {
   1627  1.11  christos   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   1628  1.11  christos   do
   1629  1.11  christos     {
   1630  1.14  christos       if (_bfd_elf_readonly_dynrelocs (&hh->eh))
   1631  1.14  christos 	return true;
   1632  1.11  christos       hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (hh->eh.u.alias);
   1633  1.11  christos     } while (hh != NULL && &hh->eh != eh);
   1634  1.11  christos 
   1635  1.14  christos   return false;
   1636  1.11  christos }
   1637  1.11  christos 
   1638   1.1     skrll /* Adjust a symbol defined by a dynamic object and referenced by a
   1639   1.1     skrll    regular object.  The current definition is in some section of the
   1640   1.1     skrll    dynamic object, but we're not including those sections.  We have to
   1641   1.1     skrll    change the definition to something the rest of the link can
   1642   1.1     skrll    understand.  */
   1643   1.1     skrll 
   1644  1.14  christos static bool
   1645   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_adjust_dynamic_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1646   1.1     skrll 				  struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh)
   1647   1.1     skrll {
   1648   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   1649  1.11  christos   asection *sec, *srel;
   1650   1.1     skrll 
   1651   1.1     skrll   /* If this is a function, put it in the procedure linkage table.  We
   1652   1.1     skrll      will fill in the contents of the procedure linkage table later.  */
   1653   1.1     skrll   if (eh->type == STT_FUNC
   1654   1.1     skrll       || eh->needs_plt)
   1655   1.1     skrll     {
   1656  1.14  christos       bool local = (SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, eh)
   1657  1.14  christos 		    || UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, eh));
   1658  1.11  christos       /* Discard dyn_relocs when non-pic if we've decided that a
   1659  1.11  christos 	 function symbol is local.  */
   1660  1.11  christos       if (!bfd_link_pic (info) && local)
   1661  1.14  christos 	eh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1662  1.11  christos 
   1663   1.6  christos       /* If the symbol is used by a plabel, we must allocate a PLT slot.
   1664   1.6  christos 	 The refcounts are not reliable when it has been hidden since
   1665   1.6  christos 	 hide_symbol can be called before the plabel flag is set.  */
   1666  1.11  christos       if (hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh)->plabel)
   1667   1.6  christos 	eh->plt.refcount = 1;
   1668   1.6  christos 
   1669  1.11  christos       /* Note that unlike some other backends, the refcount is not
   1670  1.11  christos 	 incremented for a non-call (and non-plabel) function reference.  */
   1671  1.11  christos       else if (eh->plt.refcount <= 0
   1672  1.11  christos 	       || local)
   1673   1.1     skrll 	{
   1674   1.1     skrll 	  /* The .plt entry is not needed when:
   1675   1.1     skrll 	     a) Garbage collection has removed all references to the
   1676   1.1     skrll 	     symbol, or
   1677   1.1     skrll 	     b) We know for certain the symbol is defined in this
   1678   1.1     skrll 	     object, and it's not a weak definition, nor is the symbol
   1679   1.1     skrll 	     used by a plabel relocation.  Either this object is the
   1680   1.1     skrll 	     application or we are doing a shared symbolic link.  */
   1681   1.1     skrll 	  eh->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1682   1.1     skrll 	  eh->needs_plt = 0;
   1683   1.1     skrll 	}
   1684   1.1     skrll 
   1685  1.11  christos       /* Unlike other targets, elf32-hppa.c does not define a function
   1686  1.11  christos 	 symbol in a non-pic executable on PLT stub code, so we don't
   1687  1.11  christos 	 have a local definition in that case.  ie. dyn_relocs can't
   1688  1.11  christos 	 be discarded.  */
   1689  1.11  christos 
   1690  1.11  christos       /* Function symbols can't have copy relocs.  */
   1691  1.14  christos       return true;
   1692   1.1     skrll     }
   1693   1.1     skrll   else
   1694   1.1     skrll     eh->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1695   1.1     skrll 
   1696  1.11  christos   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   1697  1.11  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1698  1.14  christos     return false;
   1699  1.11  christos 
   1700   1.1     skrll   /* If this is a weak symbol, and there is a real definition, the
   1701   1.1     skrll      processor independent code will have arranged for us to see the
   1702   1.1     skrll      real definition first, and we can just use the same value.  */
   1703  1.11  christos   if (eh->is_weakalias)
   1704   1.1     skrll     {
   1705  1.11  christos       struct elf_link_hash_entry *def = weakdef (eh);
   1706  1.11  christos       BFD_ASSERT (def->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined);
   1707  1.11  christos       eh->root.u.def.section = def->root.u.def.section;
   1708  1.11  christos       eh->root.u.def.value = def->root.u.def.value;
   1709  1.11  christos       if (def->root.u.def.section == htab->etab.sdynbss
   1710  1.11  christos 	  || def->root.u.def.section == htab->etab.sdynrelro)
   1711  1.14  christos 	eh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1712  1.14  christos       return true;
   1713   1.1     skrll     }
   1714   1.1     skrll 
   1715   1.1     skrll   /* This is a reference to a symbol defined by a dynamic object which
   1716   1.1     skrll      is not a function.  */
   1717   1.1     skrll 
   1718   1.1     skrll   /* If we are creating a shared library, we must presume that the
   1719   1.1     skrll      only references to the symbol are via the global offset table.
   1720   1.1     skrll      For such cases we need not do anything here; the relocations will
   1721   1.1     skrll      be handled correctly by relocate_section.  */
   1722   1.7  christos   if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1723  1.14  christos     return true;
   1724   1.1     skrll 
   1725   1.1     skrll   /* If there are no references to this symbol that do not use the
   1726   1.1     skrll      GOT, we don't need to generate a copy reloc.  */
   1727   1.1     skrll   if (!eh->non_got_ref)
   1728  1.14  christos     return true;
   1729   1.1     skrll 
   1730  1.11  christos   /* If -z nocopyreloc was given, we won't generate them either.  */
   1731  1.11  christos   if (info->nocopyreloc)
   1732  1.14  christos     return true;
   1733   1.1     skrll 
   1734  1.11  christos   /* If we don't find any dynamic relocs in read-only sections, then
   1735  1.11  christos      we'll be keeping the dynamic relocs and avoiding the copy reloc.  */
   1736  1.11  christos   if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
   1737  1.11  christos       && !alias_readonly_dynrelocs (eh))
   1738  1.14  christos     return true;
   1739   1.1     skrll 
   1740   1.1     skrll   /* We must allocate the symbol in our .dynbss section, which will
   1741   1.1     skrll      become part of the .bss section of the executable.  There will be
   1742   1.1     skrll      an entry for this symbol in the .dynsym section.  The dynamic
   1743   1.1     skrll      object will contain position independent code, so all references
   1744   1.1     skrll      from the dynamic object to this symbol will go through the global
   1745   1.1     skrll      offset table.  The dynamic linker will use the .dynsym entry to
   1746   1.1     skrll      determine the address it must put in the global offset table, so
   1747   1.1     skrll      both the dynamic object and the regular object will refer to the
   1748   1.1     skrll      same memory location for the variable.  */
   1749  1.11  christos   if ((eh->root.u.def.section->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   1750  1.11  christos     {
   1751  1.11  christos       sec = htab->etab.sdynrelro;
   1752  1.11  christos       srel = htab->etab.sreldynrelro;
   1753  1.11  christos     }
   1754  1.11  christos   else
   1755  1.11  christos     {
   1756  1.11  christos       sec = htab->etab.sdynbss;
   1757  1.11  christos       srel = htab->etab.srelbss;
   1758  1.11  christos     }
   1759   1.6  christos   if ((eh->root.u.def.section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0 && eh->size != 0)
   1760   1.1     skrll     {
   1761  1.11  christos       /* We must generate a COPY reloc to tell the dynamic linker to
   1762  1.11  christos 	 copy the initial value out of the dynamic object and into the
   1763  1.11  christos 	 runtime process image.  */
   1764  1.11  christos       srel->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   1765   1.1     skrll       eh->needs_copy = 1;
   1766   1.1     skrll     }
   1767   1.1     skrll 
   1768  1.11  christos   /* We no longer want dyn_relocs.  */
   1769  1.14  christos   eh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1770  1.11  christos   return _bfd_elf_adjust_dynamic_copy (info, eh, sec);
   1771  1.11  christos }
   1772  1.11  christos 
   1773  1.11  christos /* If EH is undefined, make it dynamic if that makes sense.  */
   1774  1.11  christos 
   1775  1.14  christos static bool
   1776  1.11  christos ensure_undef_dynamic (struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1777  1.11  christos 		      struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh)
   1778  1.11  christos {
   1779  1.11  christos   struct elf_link_hash_table *htab = elf_hash_table (info);
   1780   1.1     skrll 
   1781  1.11  christos   if (htab->dynamic_sections_created
   1782  1.11  christos       && (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak
   1783  1.11  christos 	  || eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined)
   1784  1.11  christos       && eh->dynindx == -1
   1785  1.11  christos       && !eh->forced_local
   1786  1.11  christos       && eh->type != STT_PARISC_MILLI
   1787  1.11  christos       && !UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, eh)
   1788  1.11  christos       && ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (eh->other) == STV_DEFAULT)
   1789  1.11  christos     return bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, eh);
   1790  1.14  christos   return true;
   1791   1.1     skrll }
   1792   1.1     skrll 
   1793   1.1     skrll /* Allocate space in the .plt for entries that won't have relocations.
   1794   1.1     skrll    ie. plabel entries.  */
   1795   1.1     skrll 
   1796  1.14  christos static bool
   1797   1.1     skrll allocate_plt_static (struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh, void *inf)
   1798   1.1     skrll {
   1799   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_link_info *info;
   1800   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   1801   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   1802   1.1     skrll   asection *sec;
   1803   1.1     skrll 
   1804   1.1     skrll   if (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect)
   1805  1.14  christos     return true;
   1806   1.1     skrll 
   1807   1.1     skrll   info = (struct bfd_link_info *) inf;
   1808   1.1     skrll   hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   1809   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   1810   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1811  1.14  christos     return false;
   1812   1.3  christos 
   1813   1.1     skrll   if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created
   1814   1.1     skrll       && eh->plt.refcount > 0)
   1815   1.1     skrll     {
   1816  1.11  christos       if (!ensure_undef_dynamic (info, eh))
   1817  1.14  christos 	return false;
   1818   1.1     skrll 
   1819   1.7  christos       if (WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (1, bfd_link_pic (info), eh))
   1820   1.1     skrll 	{
   1821   1.1     skrll 	  /* Allocate these later.  From this point on, h->plabel
   1822   1.1     skrll 	     means that the plt entry is only used by a plabel.
   1823   1.1     skrll 	     We'll be using a normal plt entry for this symbol, so
   1824   1.1     skrll 	     clear the plabel indicator.  */
   1825   1.7  christos 
   1826   1.1     skrll 	  hh->plabel = 0;
   1827   1.1     skrll 	}
   1828   1.1     skrll       else if (hh->plabel)
   1829   1.1     skrll 	{
   1830   1.1     skrll 	  /* Make an entry in the .plt section for plabel references
   1831   1.1     skrll 	     that won't have a .plt entry for other reasons.  */
   1832  1.11  christos 	  sec = htab->etab.splt;
   1833   1.1     skrll 	  eh->plt.offset = sec->size;
   1834   1.1     skrll 	  sec->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1835  1.11  christos 	  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1836  1.11  christos 	    htab->etab.srelplt->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   1837   1.1     skrll 	}
   1838   1.1     skrll       else
   1839   1.1     skrll 	{
   1840   1.1     skrll 	  /* No .plt entry needed.  */
   1841   1.1     skrll 	  eh->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1842   1.1     skrll 	  eh->needs_plt = 0;
   1843   1.1     skrll 	}
   1844   1.1     skrll     }
   1845   1.1     skrll   else
   1846   1.1     skrll     {
   1847   1.1     skrll       eh->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1848   1.1     skrll       eh->needs_plt = 0;
   1849   1.1     skrll     }
   1850   1.1     skrll 
   1851  1.14  christos   return true;
   1852   1.1     skrll }
   1853   1.1     skrll 
   1854  1.11  christos /* Calculate size of GOT entries for symbol given its TLS_TYPE.  */
   1855  1.11  christos 
   1856  1.11  christos static inline unsigned int
   1857  1.11  christos got_entries_needed (int tls_type)
   1858  1.11  christos {
   1859  1.11  christos   unsigned int need = 0;
   1860  1.11  christos 
   1861  1.11  christos   if ((tls_type & GOT_NORMAL) != 0)
   1862  1.11  christos     need += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1863  1.11  christos   if ((tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD) != 0)
   1864  1.11  christos     need += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE * 2;
   1865  1.11  christos   if ((tls_type & GOT_TLS_IE) != 0)
   1866  1.11  christos     need += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1867  1.11  christos   return need;
   1868  1.11  christos }
   1869  1.11  christos 
   1870  1.11  christos /* Calculate size of relocs needed for symbol given its TLS_TYPE and
   1871  1.12  christos    NEEDed GOT entries.  TPREL_KNOWN says a TPREL offset can be
   1872  1.12  christos    calculated at link time.  DTPREL_KNOWN says the same for a DTPREL
   1873  1.12  christos    offset.  */
   1874  1.11  christos 
   1875  1.11  christos static inline unsigned int
   1876  1.12  christos got_relocs_needed (int tls_type, unsigned int need,
   1877  1.14  christos 		   bool dtprel_known, bool tprel_known)
   1878  1.11  christos {
   1879  1.11  christos   /* All the entries we allocated need relocs.
   1880  1.12  christos      Except for GD and IE with local symbols.  */
   1881  1.12  christos   if ((tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD) != 0 && dtprel_known)
   1882  1.12  christos     need -= GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1883  1.12  christos   if ((tls_type & GOT_TLS_IE) != 0 && tprel_known)
   1884  1.11  christos     need -= GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1885  1.11  christos   return need * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela) / GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1886  1.11  christos }
   1887  1.11  christos 
   1888   1.1     skrll /* Allocate space in .plt, .got and associated reloc sections for
   1889   1.1     skrll    global syms.  */
   1890   1.1     skrll 
   1891  1.14  christos static bool
   1892   1.1     skrll allocate_dynrelocs (struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh, void *inf)
   1893   1.1     skrll {
   1894   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_link_info *info;
   1895   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   1896   1.1     skrll   asection *sec;
   1897   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   1898  1.11  christos   struct elf_dyn_relocs *hdh_p;
   1899   1.1     skrll 
   1900   1.1     skrll   if (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect)
   1901  1.14  christos     return true;
   1902   1.1     skrll 
   1903   1.1     skrll   info = inf;
   1904   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   1905   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1906  1.14  christos     return false;
   1907   1.3  christos 
   1908   1.1     skrll   hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   1909   1.7  christos 
   1910   1.1     skrll   if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created
   1911   1.1     skrll       && eh->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1
   1912   1.1     skrll       && !hh->plabel
   1913   1.1     skrll       && eh->plt.refcount > 0)
   1914   1.1     skrll     {
   1915   1.1     skrll       /* Make an entry in the .plt section.  */
   1916  1.11  christos       sec = htab->etab.splt;
   1917   1.1     skrll       eh->plt.offset = sec->size;
   1918   1.1     skrll       sec->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1919   1.1     skrll 
   1920   1.1     skrll       /* We also need to make an entry in the .rela.plt section.  */
   1921  1.11  christos       htab->etab.srelplt->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   1922   1.1     skrll       htab->need_plt_stub = 1;
   1923   1.1     skrll     }
   1924   1.1     skrll 
   1925   1.1     skrll   if (eh->got.refcount > 0)
   1926   1.1     skrll     {
   1927  1.11  christos       unsigned int need;
   1928  1.11  christos 
   1929  1.11  christos       if (!ensure_undef_dynamic (info, eh))
   1930  1.14  christos 	return false;
   1931   1.1     skrll 
   1932  1.11  christos       sec = htab->etab.sgot;
   1933   1.1     skrll       eh->got.offset = sec->size;
   1934  1.11  christos       need = got_entries_needed (hh->tls_type);
   1935  1.11  christos       sec->size += need;
   1936   1.1     skrll       if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created
   1937  1.12  christos 	  && (bfd_link_dll (info)
   1938  1.12  christos 	      || (bfd_link_pic (info) && (hh->tls_type & GOT_NORMAL) != 0)
   1939   1.1     skrll 	      || (eh->dynindx != -1
   1940  1.11  christos 		  && !SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, eh)))
   1941  1.11  christos 	  && !UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, eh))
   1942   1.1     skrll 	{
   1943  1.14  christos 	  bool local = SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, eh);
   1944  1.11  christos 	  htab->etab.srelgot->size
   1945  1.12  christos 	    += got_relocs_needed (hh->tls_type, need, local,
   1946  1.12  christos 				  local && bfd_link_executable (info));
   1947   1.1     skrll 	}
   1948   1.1     skrll     }
   1949   1.1     skrll   else
   1950   1.1     skrll     eh->got.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1951   1.1     skrll 
   1952  1.11  christos   /* If no dynamic sections we can't have dynamic relocs.  */
   1953  1.11  christos   if (!htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   1954  1.14  christos     eh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1955  1.11  christos 
   1956  1.11  christos   /* Discard relocs on undefined syms with non-default visibility.  */
   1957  1.11  christos   else if ((eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined
   1958  1.11  christos 	    && ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (eh->other) != STV_DEFAULT)
   1959  1.11  christos 	   || UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, eh))
   1960  1.14  christos     eh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1961  1.11  christos 
   1962  1.14  christos   if (eh->dyn_relocs == NULL)
   1963  1.14  christos     return true;
   1964   1.1     skrll 
   1965   1.1     skrll   /* If this is a -Bsymbolic shared link, then we need to discard all
   1966   1.1     skrll      space allocated for dynamic pc-relative relocs against symbols
   1967   1.1     skrll      defined in a regular object.  For the normal shared case, discard
   1968   1.1     skrll      space for relocs that have become local due to symbol visibility
   1969   1.1     skrll      changes.  */
   1970   1.7  christos   if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1971   1.1     skrll     {
   1972   1.1     skrll #if RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
   1973   1.1     skrll       if (SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, eh))
   1974   1.1     skrll 	{
   1975  1.11  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs **hdh_pp;
   1976   1.1     skrll 
   1977  1.14  christos 	  for (hdh_pp = &eh->dyn_relocs; (hdh_p = *hdh_pp) != NULL; )
   1978   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1979  1.11  christos 	      hdh_p->count -= hdh_p->pc_count;
   1980  1.11  christos 	      hdh_p->pc_count = 0;
   1981   1.1     skrll 	      if (hdh_p->count == 0)
   1982  1.11  christos 		*hdh_pp = hdh_p->next;
   1983   1.1     skrll 	      else
   1984  1.11  christos 		hdh_pp = &hdh_p->next;
   1985   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1986   1.1     skrll 	}
   1987   1.1     skrll #endif
   1988   1.1     skrll 
   1989  1.14  christos       if (eh->dyn_relocs != NULL)
   1990   1.1     skrll 	{
   1991  1.11  christos 	  if (!ensure_undef_dynamic (info, eh))
   1992  1.14  christos 	    return false;
   1993   1.1     skrll 	}
   1994   1.1     skrll     }
   1995  1.11  christos   else if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS)
   1996   1.1     skrll     {
   1997   1.1     skrll       /* For the non-shared case, discard space for relocs against
   1998   1.1     skrll 	 symbols which turn out to need copy relocs or are not
   1999   1.1     skrll 	 dynamic.  */
   2000   1.7  christos 
   2001  1.11  christos       if (eh->dynamic_adjusted
   2002  1.11  christos 	  && !eh->def_regular
   2003  1.11  christos 	  && !ELF_COMMON_DEF_P (eh))
   2004  1.11  christos 	{
   2005  1.11  christos 	  if (!ensure_undef_dynamic (info, eh))
   2006  1.14  christos 	    return false;
   2007   1.1     skrll 
   2008  1.11  christos 	  if (eh->dynindx == -1)
   2009  1.14  christos 	    eh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   2010   1.1     skrll 	}
   2011  1.11  christos       else
   2012  1.14  christos 	eh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   2013   1.1     skrll     }
   2014   1.1     skrll 
   2015   1.1     skrll   /* Finally, allocate space.  */
   2016  1.14  christos   for (hdh_p = eh->dyn_relocs; hdh_p != NULL; hdh_p = hdh_p->next)
   2017   1.1     skrll     {
   2018   1.1     skrll       asection *sreloc = elf_section_data (hdh_p->sec)->sreloc;
   2019   1.1     skrll       sreloc->size += hdh_p->count * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2020   1.1     skrll     }
   2021   1.1     skrll 
   2022  1.14  christos   return true;
   2023   1.1     skrll }
   2024   1.1     skrll 
   2025   1.1     skrll /* This function is called via elf_link_hash_traverse to force
   2026   1.1     skrll    millicode symbols local so they do not end up as globals in the
   2027   1.1     skrll    dynamic symbol table.  We ought to be able to do this in
   2028   1.1     skrll    adjust_dynamic_symbol, but our adjust_dynamic_symbol is not called
   2029   1.1     skrll    for all dynamic symbols.  Arguably, this is a bug in
   2030   1.1     skrll    elf_adjust_dynamic_symbol.  */
   2031   1.1     skrll 
   2032  1.14  christos static bool
   2033   1.1     skrll clobber_millicode_symbols (struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh,
   2034  1.14  christos 			   void *info)
   2035   1.1     skrll {
   2036   1.1     skrll   if (eh->type == STT_PARISC_MILLI
   2037   1.1     skrll       && !eh->forced_local)
   2038  1.14  christos     elf32_hppa_hide_symbol ((struct bfd_link_info *) info, eh, true);
   2039  1.14  christos   return true;
   2040   1.1     skrll }
   2041   1.1     skrll 
   2042   1.1     skrll /* Set the sizes of the dynamic sections.  */
   2043   1.1     skrll 
   2044  1.14  christos static bool
   2045   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_size_dynamic_sections (bfd *output_bfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   2046   1.1     skrll 				  struct bfd_link_info *info)
   2047   1.1     skrll {
   2048   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   2049   1.1     skrll   bfd *dynobj;
   2050   1.1     skrll   bfd *ibfd;
   2051   1.1     skrll   asection *sec;
   2052  1.14  christos   bool relocs;
   2053   1.1     skrll 
   2054   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2055   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2056  1.14  christos     return false;
   2057   1.3  christos 
   2058   1.1     skrll   dynobj = htab->etab.dynobj;
   2059   1.1     skrll   if (dynobj == NULL)
   2060   1.1     skrll     abort ();
   2061   1.1     skrll 
   2062   1.1     skrll   if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   2063   1.1     skrll     {
   2064   1.1     skrll       /* Set the contents of the .interp section to the interpreter.  */
   2065   1.7  christos       if (bfd_link_executable (info) && !info->nointerp)
   2066   1.1     skrll 	{
   2067   1.6  christos 	  sec = bfd_get_linker_section (dynobj, ".interp");
   2068   1.1     skrll 	  if (sec == NULL)
   2069   1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   2070   1.1     skrll 	  sec->size = sizeof ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER;
   2071   1.1     skrll 	  sec->contents = (unsigned char *) ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER;
   2072   1.1     skrll 	}
   2073   1.1     skrll 
   2074   1.1     skrll       /* Force millicode symbols local.  */
   2075   1.1     skrll       elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->etab,
   2076   1.1     skrll 			      clobber_millicode_symbols,
   2077   1.1     skrll 			      info);
   2078   1.1     skrll     }
   2079   1.1     skrll 
   2080   1.1     skrll   /* Set up .got and .plt offsets for local syms, and space for local
   2081   1.1     skrll      dynamic relocs.  */
   2082   1.7  christos   for (ibfd = info->input_bfds; ibfd != NULL; ibfd = ibfd->link.next)
   2083   1.1     skrll     {
   2084   1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *local_got;
   2085   1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *end_local_got;
   2086   1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *local_plt;
   2087   1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *end_local_plt;
   2088   1.1     skrll       bfd_size_type locsymcount;
   2089   1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   2090   1.1     skrll       asection *srel;
   2091   1.1     skrll       char *local_tls_type;
   2092   1.1     skrll 
   2093   1.1     skrll       if (bfd_get_flavour (ibfd) != bfd_target_elf_flavour)
   2094   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2095   1.1     skrll 
   2096   1.1     skrll       for (sec = ibfd->sections; sec != NULL; sec = sec->next)
   2097   1.1     skrll 	{
   2098  1.11  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs *hdh_p;
   2099   1.1     skrll 
   2100  1.11  christos 	  for (hdh_p = ((struct elf_dyn_relocs *)
   2101   1.1     skrll 		    elf_section_data (sec)->local_dynrel);
   2102   1.1     skrll 	       hdh_p != NULL;
   2103  1.11  christos 	       hdh_p = hdh_p->next)
   2104   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2105   1.1     skrll 	      if (!bfd_is_abs_section (hdh_p->sec)
   2106   1.1     skrll 		  && bfd_is_abs_section (hdh_p->sec->output_section))
   2107   1.1     skrll 		{
   2108   1.1     skrll 		  /* Input section has been discarded, either because
   2109   1.1     skrll 		     it is a copy of a linkonce section or due to
   2110   1.1     skrll 		     linker script /DISCARD/, so we'll be discarding
   2111   1.1     skrll 		     the relocs too.  */
   2112   1.1     skrll 		}
   2113   1.1     skrll 	      else if (hdh_p->count != 0)
   2114   1.1     skrll 		{
   2115   1.1     skrll 		  srel = elf_section_data (hdh_p->sec)->sreloc;
   2116   1.1     skrll 		  srel->size += hdh_p->count * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2117   1.1     skrll 		  if ((hdh_p->sec->output_section->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   2118   1.1     skrll 		    info->flags |= DF_TEXTREL;
   2119   1.1     skrll 		}
   2120   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2121   1.1     skrll 	}
   2122   1.1     skrll 
   2123   1.1     skrll       local_got = elf_local_got_refcounts (ibfd);
   2124   1.1     skrll       if (!local_got)
   2125   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2126   1.1     skrll 
   2127   1.1     skrll       symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (ibfd)->symtab_hdr;
   2128   1.1     skrll       locsymcount = symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   2129   1.1     skrll       end_local_got = local_got + locsymcount;
   2130   1.1     skrll       local_tls_type = hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type (ibfd);
   2131  1.11  christos       sec = htab->etab.sgot;
   2132  1.11  christos       srel = htab->etab.srelgot;
   2133   1.1     skrll       for (; local_got < end_local_got; ++local_got)
   2134   1.1     skrll 	{
   2135   1.1     skrll 	  if (*local_got > 0)
   2136   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2137  1.11  christos 	      unsigned int need;
   2138  1.11  christos 
   2139   1.1     skrll 	      *local_got = sec->size;
   2140  1.11  christos 	      need = got_entries_needed (*local_tls_type);
   2141  1.11  christos 	      sec->size += need;
   2142  1.12  christos 	      if (bfd_link_dll (info)
   2143  1.12  christos 		  || (bfd_link_pic (info)
   2144  1.12  christos 		      && (*local_tls_type & GOT_NORMAL) != 0))
   2145  1.12  christos 		htab->etab.srelgot->size
   2146  1.14  christos 		  += got_relocs_needed (*local_tls_type, need, true,
   2147  1.12  christos 					bfd_link_executable (info));
   2148   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2149   1.1     skrll 	  else
   2150   1.1     skrll 	    *local_got = (bfd_vma) -1;
   2151   1.1     skrll 
   2152   1.1     skrll 	  ++local_tls_type;
   2153   1.1     skrll 	}
   2154   1.1     skrll 
   2155   1.1     skrll       local_plt = end_local_got;
   2156   1.1     skrll       end_local_plt = local_plt + locsymcount;
   2157   1.1     skrll       if (! htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   2158   1.1     skrll 	{
   2159   1.1     skrll 	  /* Won't be used, but be safe.  */
   2160   1.1     skrll 	  for (; local_plt < end_local_plt; ++local_plt)
   2161   1.1     skrll 	    *local_plt = (bfd_vma) -1;
   2162   1.1     skrll 	}
   2163   1.1     skrll       else
   2164   1.1     skrll 	{
   2165  1.11  christos 	  sec = htab->etab.splt;
   2166  1.11  christos 	  srel = htab->etab.srelplt;
   2167   1.1     skrll 	  for (; local_plt < end_local_plt; ++local_plt)
   2168   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2169   1.1     skrll 	      if (*local_plt > 0)
   2170   1.1     skrll 		{
   2171   1.1     skrll 		  *local_plt = sec->size;
   2172   1.1     skrll 		  sec->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2173   1.7  christos 		  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   2174   1.1     skrll 		    srel->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2175   1.1     skrll 		}
   2176   1.1     skrll 	      else
   2177   1.1     skrll 		*local_plt = (bfd_vma) -1;
   2178   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2179   1.1     skrll 	}
   2180   1.1     skrll     }
   2181   1.7  christos 
   2182   1.1     skrll   if (htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount > 0)
   2183   1.1     skrll     {
   2184   1.7  christos       /* Allocate 2 got entries and 1 dynamic reloc for
   2185  1.11  christos 	 R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32 relocs.  */
   2186  1.11  christos       htab->tls_ldm_got.offset = htab->etab.sgot->size;
   2187  1.11  christos       htab->etab.sgot->size += (GOT_ENTRY_SIZE * 2);
   2188  1.11  christos       htab->etab.srelgot->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2189   1.1     skrll     }
   2190   1.1     skrll   else
   2191   1.1     skrll     htab->tls_ldm_got.offset = -1;
   2192   1.1     skrll 
   2193   1.1     skrll   /* Do all the .plt entries without relocs first.  The dynamic linker
   2194   1.1     skrll      uses the last .plt reloc to find the end of the .plt (and hence
   2195   1.1     skrll      the start of the .got) for lazy linking.  */
   2196   1.1     skrll   elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->etab, allocate_plt_static, info);
   2197   1.1     skrll 
   2198   1.1     skrll   /* Allocate global sym .plt and .got entries, and space for global
   2199   1.1     skrll      sym dynamic relocs.  */
   2200   1.1     skrll   elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->etab, allocate_dynrelocs, info);
   2201   1.1     skrll 
   2202   1.1     skrll   /* The check_relocs and adjust_dynamic_symbol entry points have
   2203   1.1     skrll      determined the sizes of the various dynamic sections.  Allocate
   2204   1.1     skrll      memory for them.  */
   2205  1.14  christos   relocs = false;
   2206   1.1     skrll   for (sec = dynobj->sections; sec != NULL; sec = sec->next)
   2207   1.1     skrll     {
   2208   1.1     skrll       if ((sec->flags & SEC_LINKER_CREATED) == 0)
   2209   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2210   1.1     skrll 
   2211  1.11  christos       if (sec == htab->etab.splt)
   2212   1.1     skrll 	{
   2213   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->need_plt_stub)
   2214   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2215   1.1     skrll 	      /* Make space for the plt stub at the end of the .plt
   2216   1.1     skrll 		 section.  We want this stub right at the end, up
   2217   1.1     skrll 		 against the .got section.  */
   2218  1.13  christos 	      int gotalign = bfd_section_alignment (htab->etab.sgot);
   2219  1.13  christos 	      int pltalign = bfd_section_alignment (sec);
   2220  1.13  christos 	      int align = gotalign > 3 ? gotalign : 3;
   2221   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_size_type mask;
   2222   1.1     skrll 
   2223  1.13  christos 	      if (align > pltalign)
   2224  1.13  christos 		bfd_set_section_alignment (sec, align);
   2225   1.1     skrll 	      mask = ((bfd_size_type) 1 << gotalign) - 1;
   2226   1.1     skrll 	      sec->size = (sec->size + sizeof (plt_stub) + mask) & ~mask;
   2227   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2228   1.1     skrll 	}
   2229  1.11  christos       else if (sec == htab->etab.sgot
   2230  1.11  christos 	       || sec == htab->etab.sdynbss
   2231  1.11  christos 	       || sec == htab->etab.sdynrelro)
   2232   1.1     skrll 	;
   2233  1.14  christos       else if (startswith (bfd_section_name (sec), ".rela"))
   2234   1.1     skrll 	{
   2235   1.1     skrll 	  if (sec->size != 0)
   2236   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2237   1.1     skrll 	      /* Remember whether there are any reloc sections other
   2238   1.1     skrll 		 than .rela.plt.  */
   2239  1.11  christos 	      if (sec != htab->etab.srelplt)
   2240  1.14  christos 		relocs = true;
   2241   1.1     skrll 
   2242   1.1     skrll 	      /* We use the reloc_count field as a counter if we need
   2243   1.1     skrll 		 to copy relocs into the output file.  */
   2244   1.1     skrll 	      sec->reloc_count = 0;
   2245   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2246   1.1     skrll 	}
   2247   1.1     skrll       else
   2248   1.1     skrll 	{
   2249   1.1     skrll 	  /* It's not one of our sections, so don't allocate space.  */
   2250   1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   2251   1.1     skrll 	}
   2252   1.1     skrll 
   2253   1.1     skrll       if (sec->size == 0)
   2254   1.1     skrll 	{
   2255   1.1     skrll 	  /* If we don't need this section, strip it from the
   2256   1.1     skrll 	     output file.  This is mostly to handle .rela.bss and
   2257   1.1     skrll 	     .rela.plt.  We must create both sections in
   2258   1.1     skrll 	     create_dynamic_sections, because they must be created
   2259   1.1     skrll 	     before the linker maps input sections to output
   2260   1.1     skrll 	     sections.  The linker does that before
   2261   1.1     skrll 	     adjust_dynamic_symbol is called, and it is that
   2262   1.1     skrll 	     function which decides whether anything needs to go
   2263   1.1     skrll 	     into these sections.  */
   2264   1.1     skrll 	  sec->flags |= SEC_EXCLUDE;
   2265   1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   2266   1.1     skrll 	}
   2267   1.1     skrll 
   2268   1.1     skrll       if ((sec->flags & SEC_HAS_CONTENTS) == 0)
   2269   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2270   1.1     skrll 
   2271   1.1     skrll       /* Allocate memory for the section contents.  Zero it, because
   2272   1.1     skrll 	 we may not fill in all the reloc sections.  */
   2273   1.1     skrll       sec->contents = bfd_zalloc (dynobj, sec->size);
   2274   1.1     skrll       if (sec->contents == NULL)
   2275  1.14  christos 	return false;
   2276   1.1     skrll     }
   2277   1.1     skrll 
   2278  1.14  christos   return _bfd_elf_add_dynamic_tags (output_bfd, info, relocs);
   2279   1.1     skrll }
   2280   1.1     skrll 
   2281   1.1     skrll /* External entry points for sizing and building linker stubs.  */
   2282   1.1     skrll 
   2283   1.1     skrll /* Set up various things so that we can make a list of input sections
   2284   1.1     skrll    for each output section included in the link.  Returns -1 on error,
   2285   1.1     skrll    0 when no stubs will be needed, and 1 on success.  */
   2286   1.1     skrll 
   2287   1.1     skrll int
   2288   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_setup_section_lists (bfd *output_bfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   2289   1.1     skrll {
   2290   1.1     skrll   bfd *input_bfd;
   2291   1.1     skrll   unsigned int bfd_count;
   2292   1.7  christos   unsigned int top_id, top_index;
   2293   1.1     skrll   asection *section;
   2294   1.1     skrll   asection **input_list, **list;
   2295  1.14  christos   size_t amt;
   2296   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2297   1.1     skrll 
   2298   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2299   1.3  christos     return -1;
   2300   1.3  christos 
   2301   1.1     skrll   /* Count the number of input BFDs and find the top input section id.  */
   2302   1.1     skrll   for (input_bfd = info->input_bfds, bfd_count = 0, top_id = 0;
   2303   1.1     skrll        input_bfd != NULL;
   2304   1.7  christos        input_bfd = input_bfd->link.next)
   2305   1.1     skrll     {
   2306   1.1     skrll       bfd_count += 1;
   2307   1.1     skrll       for (section = input_bfd->sections;
   2308   1.1     skrll 	   section != NULL;
   2309   1.1     skrll 	   section = section->next)
   2310   1.1     skrll 	{
   2311   1.1     skrll 	  if (top_id < section->id)
   2312   1.1     skrll 	    top_id = section->id;
   2313   1.1     skrll 	}
   2314   1.1     skrll     }
   2315   1.1     skrll   htab->bfd_count = bfd_count;
   2316   1.1     skrll 
   2317   1.1     skrll   amt = sizeof (struct map_stub) * (top_id + 1);
   2318   1.1     skrll   htab->stub_group = bfd_zmalloc (amt);
   2319   1.1     skrll   if (htab->stub_group == NULL)
   2320   1.1     skrll     return -1;
   2321   1.1     skrll 
   2322   1.1     skrll   /* We can't use output_bfd->section_count here to find the top output
   2323   1.1     skrll      section index as some sections may have been removed, and
   2324   1.1     skrll      strip_excluded_output_sections doesn't renumber the indices.  */
   2325   1.1     skrll   for (section = output_bfd->sections, top_index = 0;
   2326   1.1     skrll        section != NULL;
   2327   1.1     skrll        section = section->next)
   2328   1.1     skrll     {
   2329   1.1     skrll       if (top_index < section->index)
   2330   1.1     skrll 	top_index = section->index;
   2331   1.1     skrll     }
   2332   1.1     skrll 
   2333   1.1     skrll   htab->top_index = top_index;
   2334   1.1     skrll   amt = sizeof (asection *) * (top_index + 1);
   2335   1.1     skrll   input_list = bfd_malloc (amt);
   2336   1.1     skrll   htab->input_list = input_list;
   2337   1.1     skrll   if (input_list == NULL)
   2338   1.1     skrll     return -1;
   2339   1.1     skrll 
   2340   1.1     skrll   /* For sections we aren't interested in, mark their entries with a
   2341   1.1     skrll      value we can check later.  */
   2342   1.1     skrll   list = input_list + top_index;
   2343   1.1     skrll   do
   2344   1.1     skrll     *list = bfd_abs_section_ptr;
   2345   1.1     skrll   while (list-- != input_list);
   2346   1.1     skrll 
   2347   1.1     skrll   for (section = output_bfd->sections;
   2348   1.1     skrll        section != NULL;
   2349   1.1     skrll        section = section->next)
   2350   1.1     skrll     {
   2351   1.1     skrll       if ((section->flags & SEC_CODE) != 0)
   2352   1.1     skrll 	input_list[section->index] = NULL;
   2353   1.1     skrll     }
   2354   1.1     skrll 
   2355   1.1     skrll   return 1;
   2356   1.1     skrll }
   2357   1.1     skrll 
   2358   1.1     skrll /* The linker repeatedly calls this function for each input section,
   2359   1.1     skrll    in the order that input sections are linked into output sections.
   2360   1.1     skrll    Build lists of input sections to determine groupings between which
   2361   1.1     skrll    we may insert linker stubs.  */
   2362   1.1     skrll 
   2363   1.1     skrll void
   2364   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_next_input_section (struct bfd_link_info *info, asection *isec)
   2365   1.1     skrll {
   2366   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2367   1.1     skrll 
   2368   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2369   1.3  christos     return;
   2370   1.3  christos 
   2371   1.1     skrll   if (isec->output_section->index <= htab->top_index)
   2372   1.1     skrll     {
   2373   1.1     skrll       asection **list = htab->input_list + isec->output_section->index;
   2374   1.1     skrll       if (*list != bfd_abs_section_ptr)
   2375   1.1     skrll 	{
   2376   1.1     skrll 	  /* Steal the link_sec pointer for our list.  */
   2377   1.1     skrll #define PREV_SEC(sec) (htab->stub_group[(sec)->id].link_sec)
   2378   1.1     skrll 	  /* This happens to make the list in reverse order,
   2379   1.1     skrll 	     which is what we want.  */
   2380   1.1     skrll 	  PREV_SEC (isec) = *list;
   2381   1.1     skrll 	  *list = isec;
   2382   1.1     skrll 	}
   2383   1.1     skrll     }
   2384   1.1     skrll }
   2385   1.1     skrll 
   2386   1.1     skrll /* See whether we can group stub sections together.  Grouping stub
   2387   1.1     skrll    sections may result in fewer stubs.  More importantly, we need to
   2388   1.1     skrll    put all .init* and .fini* stubs at the beginning of the .init or
   2389   1.1     skrll    .fini output sections respectively, because glibc splits the
   2390   1.1     skrll    _init and _fini functions into multiple parts.  Putting a stub in
   2391   1.1     skrll    the middle of a function is not a good idea.  */
   2392   1.1     skrll 
   2393   1.1     skrll static void
   2394   1.1     skrll group_sections (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab,
   2395   1.1     skrll 		bfd_size_type stub_group_size,
   2396  1.14  christos 		bool stubs_always_before_branch)
   2397   1.1     skrll {
   2398   1.1     skrll   asection **list = htab->input_list + htab->top_index;
   2399   1.1     skrll   do
   2400   1.1     skrll     {
   2401   1.1     skrll       asection *tail = *list;
   2402   1.1     skrll       if (tail == bfd_abs_section_ptr)
   2403   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2404   1.1     skrll       while (tail != NULL)
   2405   1.1     skrll 	{
   2406   1.1     skrll 	  asection *curr;
   2407   1.1     skrll 	  asection *prev;
   2408   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_size_type total;
   2409  1.14  christos 	  bool big_sec;
   2410   1.1     skrll 
   2411   1.1     skrll 	  curr = tail;
   2412   1.1     skrll 	  total = tail->size;
   2413   1.1     skrll 	  big_sec = total >= stub_group_size;
   2414   1.1     skrll 
   2415   1.1     skrll 	  while ((prev = PREV_SEC (curr)) != NULL
   2416   1.1     skrll 		 && ((total += curr->output_offset - prev->output_offset)
   2417   1.1     skrll 		     < stub_group_size))
   2418   1.1     skrll 	    curr = prev;
   2419   1.1     skrll 
   2420   1.1     skrll 	  /* OK, the size from the start of CURR to the end is less
   2421   1.1     skrll 	     than 240000 bytes and thus can be handled by one stub
   2422   1.1     skrll 	     section.  (or the tail section is itself larger than
   2423   1.1     skrll 	     240000 bytes, in which case we may be toast.)
   2424   1.1     skrll 	     We should really be keeping track of the total size of
   2425   1.1     skrll 	     stubs added here, as stubs contribute to the final output
   2426   1.1     skrll 	     section size.  That's a little tricky, and this way will
   2427   1.1     skrll 	     only break if stubs added total more than 22144 bytes, or
   2428   1.1     skrll 	     2768 long branch stubs.  It seems unlikely for more than
   2429   1.1     skrll 	     2768 different functions to be called, especially from
   2430   1.1     skrll 	     code only 240000 bytes long.  This limit used to be
   2431   1.1     skrll 	     250000, but c++ code tends to generate lots of little
   2432   1.1     skrll 	     functions, and sometimes violated the assumption.  */
   2433   1.1     skrll 	  do
   2434   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2435   1.1     skrll 	      prev = PREV_SEC (tail);
   2436   1.1     skrll 	      /* Set up this stub group.  */
   2437   1.1     skrll 	      htab->stub_group[tail->id].link_sec = curr;
   2438   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2439   1.1     skrll 	  while (tail != curr && (tail = prev) != NULL);
   2440   1.1     skrll 
   2441   1.1     skrll 	  /* But wait, there's more!  Input sections up to 240000
   2442   1.1     skrll 	     bytes before the stub section can be handled by it too.
   2443   1.1     skrll 	     Don't do this if we have a really large section after the
   2444   1.1     skrll 	     stubs, as adding more stubs increases the chance that
   2445   1.1     skrll 	     branches may not reach into the stub section.  */
   2446   1.1     skrll 	  if (!stubs_always_before_branch && !big_sec)
   2447   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2448   1.1     skrll 	      total = 0;
   2449   1.1     skrll 	      while (prev != NULL
   2450   1.1     skrll 		     && ((total += tail->output_offset - prev->output_offset)
   2451   1.1     skrll 			 < stub_group_size))
   2452   1.1     skrll 		{
   2453   1.1     skrll 		  tail = prev;
   2454   1.1     skrll 		  prev = PREV_SEC (tail);
   2455   1.1     skrll 		  htab->stub_group[tail->id].link_sec = curr;
   2456   1.1     skrll 		}
   2457   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2458   1.1     skrll 	  tail = prev;
   2459   1.1     skrll 	}
   2460   1.1     skrll     }
   2461   1.1     skrll   while (list-- != htab->input_list);
   2462   1.1     skrll   free (htab->input_list);
   2463   1.1     skrll #undef PREV_SEC
   2464   1.1     skrll }
   2465   1.1     skrll 
   2466   1.1     skrll /* Read in all local syms for all input bfds, and create hash entries
   2467   1.1     skrll    for export stubs if we are building a multi-subspace shared lib.
   2468   1.1     skrll    Returns -1 on error, 1 if export stubs created, 0 otherwise.  */
   2469   1.1     skrll 
   2470   1.1     skrll static int
   2471   1.1     skrll get_local_syms (bfd *output_bfd, bfd *input_bfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   2472   1.1     skrll {
   2473   1.1     skrll   unsigned int bfd_indx;
   2474   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Sym *local_syms, **all_local_syms;
   2475   1.1     skrll   int stub_changed = 0;
   2476   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2477   1.1     skrll 
   2478   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2479   1.3  christos     return -1;
   2480   1.3  christos 
   2481   1.1     skrll   /* We want to read in symbol extension records only once.  To do this
   2482   1.1     skrll      we need to read in the local symbols in parallel and save them for
   2483   1.1     skrll      later use; so hold pointers to the local symbols in an array.  */
   2484  1.14  christos   size_t amt = sizeof (Elf_Internal_Sym *) * htab->bfd_count;
   2485   1.1     skrll   all_local_syms = bfd_zmalloc (amt);
   2486   1.1     skrll   htab->all_local_syms = all_local_syms;
   2487   1.1     skrll   if (all_local_syms == NULL)
   2488   1.1     skrll     return -1;
   2489   1.1     skrll 
   2490   1.1     skrll   /* Walk over all the input BFDs, swapping in local symbols.
   2491   1.1     skrll      If we are creating a shared library, create hash entries for the
   2492   1.1     skrll      export stubs.  */
   2493   1.1     skrll   for (bfd_indx = 0;
   2494   1.1     skrll        input_bfd != NULL;
   2495   1.7  christos        input_bfd = input_bfd->link.next, bfd_indx++)
   2496   1.1     skrll     {
   2497   1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   2498   1.1     skrll 
   2499   1.1     skrll       /* We'll need the symbol table in a second.  */
   2500   1.1     skrll       symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (input_bfd)->symtab_hdr;
   2501   1.1     skrll       if (symtab_hdr->sh_info == 0)
   2502   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2503   1.1     skrll 
   2504   1.1     skrll       /* We need an array of the local symbols attached to the input bfd.  */
   2505   1.1     skrll       local_syms = (Elf_Internal_Sym *) symtab_hdr->contents;
   2506   1.1     skrll       if (local_syms == NULL)
   2507   1.1     skrll 	{
   2508   1.1     skrll 	  local_syms = bfd_elf_get_elf_syms (input_bfd, symtab_hdr,
   2509   1.1     skrll 					     symtab_hdr->sh_info, 0,
   2510   1.1     skrll 					     NULL, NULL, NULL);
   2511   1.1     skrll 	  /* Cache them for elf_link_input_bfd.  */
   2512   1.1     skrll 	  symtab_hdr->contents = (unsigned char *) local_syms;
   2513   1.1     skrll 	}
   2514   1.1     skrll       if (local_syms == NULL)
   2515   1.1     skrll 	return -1;
   2516   1.1     skrll 
   2517   1.1     skrll       all_local_syms[bfd_indx] = local_syms;
   2518   1.1     skrll 
   2519   1.7  christos       if (bfd_link_pic (info) && htab->multi_subspace)
   2520   1.1     skrll 	{
   2521   1.1     skrll 	  struct elf_link_hash_entry **eh_syms;
   2522   1.1     skrll 	  struct elf_link_hash_entry **eh_symend;
   2523   1.1     skrll 	  unsigned int symcount;
   2524   1.1     skrll 
   2525   1.1     skrll 	  symcount = (symtab_hdr->sh_size / sizeof (Elf32_External_Sym)
   2526   1.1     skrll 		      - symtab_hdr->sh_info);
   2527   1.1     skrll 	  eh_syms = (struct elf_link_hash_entry **) elf_sym_hashes (input_bfd);
   2528   1.1     skrll 	  eh_symend = (struct elf_link_hash_entry **) (eh_syms + symcount);
   2529   1.1     skrll 
   2530   1.1     skrll 	  /* Look through the global syms for functions;  We need to
   2531   1.1     skrll 	     build export stubs for all globally visible functions.  */
   2532   1.1     skrll 	  for (; eh_syms < eh_symend; eh_syms++)
   2533   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2534   1.1     skrll 	      struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   2535   1.1     skrll 
   2536   1.1     skrll 	      hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (*eh_syms);
   2537   1.1     skrll 
   2538   1.1     skrll 	      while (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
   2539   1.1     skrll 		     || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   2540   1.1     skrll 		   hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (hh->eh.root.u.i.link);
   2541   1.1     skrll 
   2542   1.1     skrll 	      /* At this point in the link, undefined syms have been
   2543   1.1     skrll 		 resolved, so we need to check that the symbol was
   2544   1.1     skrll 		 defined in this BFD.  */
   2545   1.1     skrll 	      if ((hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   2546   1.1     skrll 		   || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)
   2547   1.1     skrll 		  && hh->eh.type == STT_FUNC
   2548   1.1     skrll 		  && hh->eh.root.u.def.section->output_section != NULL
   2549   1.1     skrll 		  && (hh->eh.root.u.def.section->output_section->owner
   2550   1.1     skrll 		      == output_bfd)
   2551   1.1     skrll 		  && hh->eh.root.u.def.section->owner == input_bfd
   2552   1.1     skrll 		  && hh->eh.def_regular
   2553   1.1     skrll 		  && !hh->eh.forced_local
   2554   1.1     skrll 		  && ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (hh->eh.other) == STV_DEFAULT)
   2555   1.1     skrll 		{
   2556   1.1     skrll 		  asection *sec;
   2557   1.1     skrll 		  const char *stub_name;
   2558   1.1     skrll 		  struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
   2559   1.1     skrll 
   2560   1.1     skrll 		  sec = hh->eh.root.u.def.section;
   2561   1.1     skrll 		  stub_name = hh_name (hh);
   2562   1.1     skrll 		  hsh = hppa_stub_hash_lookup (&htab->bstab,
   2563   1.1     skrll 						      stub_name,
   2564  1.14  christos 						      false, false);
   2565   1.1     skrll 		  if (hsh == NULL)
   2566   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2567   1.1     skrll 		      hsh = hppa_add_stub (stub_name, sec, htab);
   2568   1.1     skrll 		      if (!hsh)
   2569   1.1     skrll 			return -1;
   2570   1.1     skrll 
   2571   1.1     skrll 		      hsh->target_value = hh->eh.root.u.def.value;
   2572   1.1     skrll 		      hsh->target_section = hh->eh.root.u.def.section;
   2573   1.1     skrll 		      hsh->stub_type = hppa_stub_export;
   2574   1.1     skrll 		      hsh->hh = hh;
   2575   1.1     skrll 		      stub_changed = 1;
   2576   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2577   1.1     skrll 		  else
   2578   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2579  1.11  christos 		      /* xgettext:c-format */
   2580  1.12  christos 		      _bfd_error_handler (_("%pB: duplicate export stub %s"),
   2581  1.11  christos 					  input_bfd, stub_name);
   2582   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2583   1.1     skrll 		}
   2584   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2585   1.1     skrll 	}
   2586   1.1     skrll     }
   2587   1.1     skrll 
   2588   1.1     skrll   return stub_changed;
   2589   1.1     skrll }
   2590   1.1     skrll 
   2591   1.1     skrll /* Determine and set the size of the stub section for a final link.
   2592   1.1     skrll 
   2593   1.1     skrll    The basic idea here is to examine all the relocations looking for
   2594   1.1     skrll    PC-relative calls to a target that is unreachable with a "bl"
   2595   1.1     skrll    instruction.  */
   2596   1.1     skrll 
   2597  1.14  christos bool
   2598   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_size_stubs
   2599   1.1     skrll   (bfd *output_bfd, bfd *stub_bfd, struct bfd_link_info *info,
   2600  1.14  christos    bool multi_subspace, bfd_signed_vma group_size,
   2601   1.1     skrll    asection * (*add_stub_section) (const char *, asection *),
   2602   1.1     skrll    void (*layout_sections_again) (void))
   2603   1.1     skrll {
   2604   1.1     skrll   bfd_size_type stub_group_size;
   2605  1.14  christos   bool stubs_always_before_branch;
   2606  1.14  christos   bool stub_changed;
   2607   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2608   1.1     skrll 
   2609   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2610  1.14  christos     return false;
   2611   1.3  christos 
   2612   1.1     skrll   /* Stash our params away.  */
   2613   1.1     skrll   htab->stub_bfd = stub_bfd;
   2614   1.1     skrll   htab->multi_subspace = multi_subspace;
   2615   1.1     skrll   htab->add_stub_section = add_stub_section;
   2616   1.1     skrll   htab->layout_sections_again = layout_sections_again;
   2617   1.1     skrll   stubs_always_before_branch = group_size < 0;
   2618   1.1     skrll   if (group_size < 0)
   2619   1.1     skrll     stub_group_size = -group_size;
   2620   1.1     skrll   else
   2621   1.1     skrll     stub_group_size = group_size;
   2622   1.1     skrll   if (stub_group_size == 1)
   2623   1.1     skrll     {
   2624   1.1     skrll       /* Default values.  */
   2625   1.1     skrll       if (stubs_always_before_branch)
   2626   1.1     skrll 	{
   2627   1.1     skrll 	  stub_group_size = 7680000;
   2628   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->has_17bit_branch || htab->multi_subspace)
   2629   1.1     skrll 	    stub_group_size = 240000;
   2630   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->has_12bit_branch)
   2631   1.1     skrll 	    stub_group_size = 7500;
   2632   1.1     skrll 	}
   2633   1.1     skrll       else
   2634   1.1     skrll 	{
   2635   1.1     skrll 	  stub_group_size = 6971392;
   2636   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->has_17bit_branch || htab->multi_subspace)
   2637   1.1     skrll 	    stub_group_size = 217856;
   2638   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->has_12bit_branch)
   2639   1.1     skrll 	    stub_group_size = 6808;
   2640   1.1     skrll 	}
   2641   1.1     skrll     }
   2642   1.1     skrll 
   2643   1.1     skrll   group_sections (htab, stub_group_size, stubs_always_before_branch);
   2644   1.1     skrll 
   2645   1.1     skrll   switch (get_local_syms (output_bfd, info->input_bfds, info))
   2646   1.1     skrll     {
   2647   1.1     skrll     default:
   2648   1.1     skrll       if (htab->all_local_syms)
   2649   1.1     skrll 	goto error_ret_free_local;
   2650  1.14  christos       return false;
   2651   1.1     skrll 
   2652   1.1     skrll     case 0:
   2653  1.14  christos       stub_changed = false;
   2654   1.1     skrll       break;
   2655   1.1     skrll 
   2656   1.1     skrll     case 1:
   2657  1.14  christos       stub_changed = true;
   2658   1.1     skrll       break;
   2659   1.1     skrll     }
   2660   1.1     skrll 
   2661   1.1     skrll   while (1)
   2662   1.1     skrll     {
   2663   1.1     skrll       bfd *input_bfd;
   2664   1.1     skrll       unsigned int bfd_indx;
   2665   1.1     skrll       asection *stub_sec;
   2666   1.1     skrll 
   2667   1.1     skrll       for (input_bfd = info->input_bfds, bfd_indx = 0;
   2668   1.1     skrll 	   input_bfd != NULL;
   2669   1.7  christos 	   input_bfd = input_bfd->link.next, bfd_indx++)
   2670   1.1     skrll 	{
   2671   1.1     skrll 	  Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   2672   1.1     skrll 	  asection *section;
   2673   1.1     skrll 	  Elf_Internal_Sym *local_syms;
   2674   1.1     skrll 
   2675   1.1     skrll 	  /* We'll need the symbol table in a second.  */
   2676   1.1     skrll 	  symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (input_bfd)->symtab_hdr;
   2677   1.1     skrll 	  if (symtab_hdr->sh_info == 0)
   2678   1.1     skrll 	    continue;
   2679   1.1     skrll 
   2680   1.1     skrll 	  local_syms = htab->all_local_syms[bfd_indx];
   2681   1.1     skrll 
   2682   1.1     skrll 	  /* Walk over each section attached to the input bfd.  */
   2683   1.1     skrll 	  for (section = input_bfd->sections;
   2684   1.1     skrll 	       section != NULL;
   2685   1.1     skrll 	       section = section->next)
   2686   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2687   1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela *internal_relocs, *irelaend, *irela;
   2688   1.1     skrll 
   2689   1.1     skrll 	      /* If there aren't any relocs, then there's nothing more
   2690   1.1     skrll 		 to do.  */
   2691   1.1     skrll 	      if ((section->flags & SEC_RELOC) == 0
   2692  1.12  christos 		  || (section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) == 0
   2693  1.12  christos 		  || (section->flags & SEC_LOAD) == 0
   2694  1.12  christos 		  || (section->flags & SEC_CODE) == 0
   2695   1.1     skrll 		  || section->reloc_count == 0)
   2696   1.1     skrll 		continue;
   2697   1.1     skrll 
   2698   1.1     skrll 	      /* If this section is a link-once section that will be
   2699   1.1     skrll 		 discarded, then don't create any stubs.  */
   2700   1.1     skrll 	      if (section->output_section == NULL
   2701   1.1     skrll 		  || section->output_section->owner != output_bfd)
   2702   1.1     skrll 		continue;
   2703   1.1     skrll 
   2704   1.1     skrll 	      /* Get the relocs.  */
   2705   1.1     skrll 	      internal_relocs
   2706   1.1     skrll 		= _bfd_elf_link_read_relocs (input_bfd, section, NULL, NULL,
   2707   1.1     skrll 					     info->keep_memory);
   2708   1.1     skrll 	      if (internal_relocs == NULL)
   2709   1.1     skrll 		goto error_ret_free_local;
   2710   1.1     skrll 
   2711   1.1     skrll 	      /* Now examine each relocation.  */
   2712   1.1     skrll 	      irela = internal_relocs;
   2713   1.1     skrll 	      irelaend = irela + section->reloc_count;
   2714   1.1     skrll 	      for (; irela < irelaend; irela++)
   2715   1.1     skrll 		{
   2716   1.1     skrll 		  unsigned int r_type, r_indx;
   2717   1.1     skrll 		  enum elf32_hppa_stub_type stub_type;
   2718   1.1     skrll 		  struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
   2719   1.1     skrll 		  asection *sym_sec;
   2720   1.1     skrll 		  bfd_vma sym_value;
   2721   1.1     skrll 		  bfd_vma destination;
   2722   1.1     skrll 		  struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   2723   1.1     skrll 		  char *stub_name;
   2724   1.1     skrll 		  const asection *id_sec;
   2725   1.1     skrll 
   2726   1.1     skrll 		  r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (irela->r_info);
   2727   1.1     skrll 		  r_indx = ELF32_R_SYM (irela->r_info);
   2728   1.1     skrll 
   2729   1.1     skrll 		  if (r_type >= (unsigned int) R_PARISC_UNIMPLEMENTED)
   2730   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2731   1.1     skrll 		      bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   2732   1.1     skrll 		    error_ret_free_internal:
   2733   1.1     skrll 		      if (elf_section_data (section)->relocs == NULL)
   2734   1.1     skrll 			free (internal_relocs);
   2735   1.1     skrll 		      goto error_ret_free_local;
   2736   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2737   1.1     skrll 
   2738   1.1     skrll 		  /* Only look for stubs on call instructions.  */
   2739   1.1     skrll 		  if (r_type != (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL12F
   2740   1.1     skrll 		      && r_type != (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL17F
   2741   1.1     skrll 		      && r_type != (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL22F)
   2742   1.1     skrll 		    continue;
   2743   1.1     skrll 
   2744   1.1     skrll 		  /* Now determine the call target, its name, value,
   2745   1.1     skrll 		     section.  */
   2746   1.1     skrll 		  sym_sec = NULL;
   2747   1.1     skrll 		  sym_value = 0;
   2748  1.12  christos 		  destination = -1;
   2749   1.1     skrll 		  hh = NULL;
   2750   1.1     skrll 		  if (r_indx < symtab_hdr->sh_info)
   2751   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2752   1.1     skrll 		      /* It's a local symbol.  */
   2753   1.1     skrll 		      Elf_Internal_Sym *sym;
   2754   1.1     skrll 		      Elf_Internal_Shdr *hdr;
   2755   1.1     skrll 		      unsigned int shndx;
   2756   1.1     skrll 
   2757   1.1     skrll 		      sym = local_syms + r_indx;
   2758   1.1     skrll 		      if (ELF_ST_TYPE (sym->st_info) != STT_SECTION)
   2759   1.1     skrll 			sym_value = sym->st_value;
   2760   1.1     skrll 		      shndx = sym->st_shndx;
   2761   1.1     skrll 		      if (shndx < elf_numsections (input_bfd))
   2762   1.1     skrll 			{
   2763   1.1     skrll 			  hdr = elf_elfsections (input_bfd)[shndx];
   2764   1.1     skrll 			  sym_sec = hdr->bfd_section;
   2765   1.1     skrll 			  destination = (sym_value + irela->r_addend
   2766   1.1     skrll 					 + sym_sec->output_offset
   2767   1.1     skrll 					 + sym_sec->output_section->vma);
   2768   1.1     skrll 			}
   2769   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2770   1.1     skrll 		  else
   2771   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2772   1.1     skrll 		      /* It's an external symbol.  */
   2773   1.1     skrll 		      int e_indx;
   2774   1.1     skrll 
   2775   1.1     skrll 		      e_indx = r_indx - symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   2776   1.1     skrll 		      hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (elf_sym_hashes (input_bfd)[e_indx]);
   2777   1.1     skrll 
   2778   1.1     skrll 		      while (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
   2779   1.1     skrll 			     || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   2780   1.1     skrll 			hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (hh->eh.root.u.i.link);
   2781   1.1     skrll 
   2782   1.1     skrll 		      if (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   2783   1.1     skrll 			  || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)
   2784   1.1     skrll 			{
   2785   1.1     skrll 			  sym_sec = hh->eh.root.u.def.section;
   2786   1.1     skrll 			  sym_value = hh->eh.root.u.def.value;
   2787   1.1     skrll 			  if (sym_sec->output_section != NULL)
   2788   1.1     skrll 			    destination = (sym_value + irela->r_addend
   2789   1.1     skrll 					   + sym_sec->output_offset
   2790   1.1     skrll 					   + sym_sec->output_section->vma);
   2791   1.1     skrll 			}
   2792   1.1     skrll 		      else if (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   2793   1.1     skrll 			{
   2794   1.7  christos 			  if (! bfd_link_pic (info))
   2795   1.1     skrll 			    continue;
   2796   1.1     skrll 			}
   2797   1.1     skrll 		      else if (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined)
   2798   1.1     skrll 			{
   2799   1.1     skrll 			  if (! (info->unresolved_syms_in_objects == RM_IGNORE
   2800   1.1     skrll 				 && (ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (hh->eh.other)
   2801   1.1     skrll 				     == STV_DEFAULT)
   2802   1.1     skrll 				 && hh->eh.type != STT_PARISC_MILLI))
   2803   1.1     skrll 			    continue;
   2804   1.1     skrll 			}
   2805   1.1     skrll 		      else
   2806   1.1     skrll 			{
   2807   1.1     skrll 			  bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   2808   1.1     skrll 			  goto error_ret_free_internal;
   2809   1.1     skrll 			}
   2810   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2811   1.1     skrll 
   2812   1.1     skrll 		  /* Determine what (if any) linker stub is needed.  */
   2813   1.1     skrll 		  stub_type = hppa_type_of_stub (section, irela, hh,
   2814   1.1     skrll 						 destination, info);
   2815   1.1     skrll 		  if (stub_type == hppa_stub_none)
   2816   1.1     skrll 		    continue;
   2817   1.1     skrll 
   2818   1.1     skrll 		  /* Support for grouping stub sections.  */
   2819   1.1     skrll 		  id_sec = htab->stub_group[section->id].link_sec;
   2820   1.1     skrll 
   2821   1.1     skrll 		  /* Get the name of this stub.  */
   2822   1.1     skrll 		  stub_name = hppa_stub_name (id_sec, sym_sec, hh, irela);
   2823   1.1     skrll 		  if (!stub_name)
   2824   1.1     skrll 		    goto error_ret_free_internal;
   2825   1.1     skrll 
   2826   1.1     skrll 		  hsh = hppa_stub_hash_lookup (&htab->bstab,
   2827   1.1     skrll 						      stub_name,
   2828  1.14  christos 						      false, false);
   2829   1.1     skrll 		  if (hsh != NULL)
   2830   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2831   1.1     skrll 		      /* The proper stub has already been created.  */
   2832   1.1     skrll 		      free (stub_name);
   2833   1.1     skrll 		      continue;
   2834   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2835   1.1     skrll 
   2836   1.1     skrll 		  hsh = hppa_add_stub (stub_name, section, htab);
   2837   1.1     skrll 		  if (hsh == NULL)
   2838   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2839   1.1     skrll 		      free (stub_name);
   2840   1.1     skrll 		      goto error_ret_free_internal;
   2841   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2842   1.1     skrll 
   2843   1.1     skrll 		  hsh->target_value = sym_value;
   2844   1.1     skrll 		  hsh->target_section = sym_sec;
   2845   1.1     skrll 		  hsh->stub_type = stub_type;
   2846   1.7  christos 		  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   2847   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2848   1.1     skrll 		      if (stub_type == hppa_stub_import)
   2849   1.1     skrll 			hsh->stub_type = hppa_stub_import_shared;
   2850   1.1     skrll 		      else if (stub_type == hppa_stub_long_branch)
   2851   1.1     skrll 			hsh->stub_type = hppa_stub_long_branch_shared;
   2852   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2853   1.1     skrll 		  hsh->hh = hh;
   2854  1.14  christos 		  stub_changed = true;
   2855   1.1     skrll 		}
   2856   1.1     skrll 
   2857   1.1     skrll 	      /* We're done with the internal relocs, free them.  */
   2858   1.1     skrll 	      if (elf_section_data (section)->relocs == NULL)
   2859   1.1     skrll 		free (internal_relocs);
   2860   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2861   1.1     skrll 	}
   2862   1.1     skrll 
   2863   1.1     skrll       if (!stub_changed)
   2864   1.1     skrll 	break;
   2865   1.1     skrll 
   2866   1.1     skrll       /* OK, we've added some stubs.  Find out the new size of the
   2867   1.1     skrll 	 stub sections.  */
   2868   1.1     skrll       for (stub_sec = htab->stub_bfd->sections;
   2869   1.1     skrll 	   stub_sec != NULL;
   2870   1.1     skrll 	   stub_sec = stub_sec->next)
   2871  1.10  christos 	if ((stub_sec->flags & SEC_LINKER_CREATED) == 0)
   2872  1.10  christos 	  stub_sec->size = 0;
   2873   1.1     skrll 
   2874   1.1     skrll       bfd_hash_traverse (&htab->bstab, hppa_size_one_stub, htab);
   2875   1.1     skrll 
   2876   1.1     skrll       /* Ask the linker to do its stuff.  */
   2877   1.1     skrll       (*htab->layout_sections_again) ();
   2878  1.14  christos       stub_changed = false;
   2879   1.1     skrll     }
   2880   1.1     skrll 
   2881   1.1     skrll   free (htab->all_local_syms);
   2882  1.14  christos   return true;
   2883   1.1     skrll 
   2884   1.1     skrll  error_ret_free_local:
   2885   1.1     skrll   free (htab->all_local_syms);
   2886  1.14  christos   return false;
   2887   1.1     skrll }
   2888   1.1     skrll 
   2889   1.1     skrll /* For a final link, this function is called after we have sized the
   2890   1.1     skrll    stubs to provide a value for __gp.  */
   2891   1.1     skrll 
   2892  1.14  christos bool
   2893   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_set_gp (bfd *abfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   2894   1.1     skrll {
   2895   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_link_hash_entry *h;
   2896   1.1     skrll   asection *sec = NULL;
   2897   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma gp_val = 0;
   2898   1.1     skrll 
   2899  1.14  christos   h = bfd_link_hash_lookup (info->hash, "$global$", false, false, false);
   2900   1.1     skrll 
   2901   1.1     skrll   if (h != NULL
   2902   1.1     skrll       && (h->type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   2903   1.1     skrll 	  || h->type == bfd_link_hash_defweak))
   2904   1.1     skrll     {
   2905   1.1     skrll       gp_val = h->u.def.value;
   2906   1.1     skrll       sec = h->u.def.section;
   2907   1.1     skrll     }
   2908   1.1     skrll   else
   2909   1.1     skrll     {
   2910   1.1     skrll       asection *splt = bfd_get_section_by_name (abfd, ".plt");
   2911   1.1     skrll       asection *sgot = bfd_get_section_by_name (abfd, ".got");
   2912   1.1     skrll 
   2913   1.1     skrll       /* Choose to point our LTP at, in this order, one of .plt, .got,
   2914   1.1     skrll 	 or .data, if these sections exist.  In the case of choosing
   2915   1.1     skrll 	 .plt try to make the LTP ideal for addressing anywhere in the
   2916   1.1     skrll 	 .plt or .got with a 14 bit signed offset.  Typically, the end
   2917   1.1     skrll 	 of the .plt is the start of the .got, so choose .plt + 0x2000
   2918   1.1     skrll 	 if either the .plt or .got is larger than 0x2000.  If both
   2919   1.1     skrll 	 the .plt and .got are smaller than 0x2000, choose the end of
   2920   1.1     skrll 	 the .plt section.  */
   2921   1.1     skrll       sec = strcmp (bfd_get_target (abfd), "elf32-hppa-netbsd") == 0
   2922   1.1     skrll 	  ? NULL : splt;
   2923   1.1     skrll       if (sec != NULL)
   2924   1.1     skrll 	{
   2925   1.1     skrll 	  gp_val = sec->size;
   2926   1.1     skrll 	  if (gp_val > 0x2000 || (sgot && sgot->size > 0x2000))
   2927   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2928   1.1     skrll 	      gp_val = 0x2000;
   2929   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2930   1.1     skrll 	}
   2931   1.1     skrll       else
   2932   1.1     skrll 	{
   2933   1.1     skrll 	  sec = sgot;
   2934   1.1     skrll 	  if (sec != NULL)
   2935   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2936   1.1     skrll 	      if (strcmp (bfd_get_target (abfd), "elf32-hppa-netbsd") != 0)
   2937   1.1     skrll 		{
   2938  1.11  christos 		  /* We know we don't have a .plt.  If .got is large,
   2939   1.1     skrll 		     offset our LTP.  */
   2940  1.11  christos 		  if (sec->size > 0x2000)
   2941   1.1     skrll 		    gp_val = 0x2000;
   2942   1.1     skrll 		}
   2943   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2944   1.1     skrll 	  else
   2945   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2946   1.1     skrll 	      /* No .plt or .got.  Who cares what the LTP is?  */
   2947   1.1     skrll 	      sec = bfd_get_section_by_name (abfd, ".data");
   2948   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2949   1.1     skrll 	}
   2950   1.1     skrll 
   2951   1.1     skrll       if (h != NULL)
   2952   1.1     skrll 	{
   2953   1.1     skrll 	  h->type = bfd_link_hash_defined;
   2954   1.1     skrll 	  h->u.def.value = gp_val;
   2955   1.1     skrll 	  if (sec != NULL)
   2956   1.1     skrll 	    h->u.def.section = sec;
   2957   1.1     skrll 	  else
   2958   1.1     skrll 	    h->u.def.section = bfd_abs_section_ptr;
   2959   1.1     skrll 	}
   2960   1.1     skrll     }
   2961   1.1     skrll 
   2962  1.11  christos   if (bfd_get_flavour (abfd) == bfd_target_elf_flavour)
   2963  1.11  christos     {
   2964  1.11  christos       if (sec != NULL && sec->output_section != NULL)
   2965  1.11  christos 	gp_val += sec->output_section->vma + sec->output_offset;
   2966   1.1     skrll 
   2967  1.11  christos       elf_gp (abfd) = gp_val;
   2968  1.11  christos     }
   2969  1.14  christos   return true;
   2970   1.1     skrll }
   2971   1.1     skrll 
   2972   1.1     skrll /* Build all the stubs associated with the current output file.  The
   2973   1.1     skrll    stubs are kept in a hash table attached to the main linker hash
   2974   1.1     skrll    table.  We also set up the .plt entries for statically linked PIC
   2975   1.1     skrll    functions here.  This function is called via hppaelf_finish in the
   2976   1.1     skrll    linker.  */
   2977   1.1     skrll 
   2978  1.14  christos bool
   2979   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_build_stubs (struct bfd_link_info *info)
   2980   1.1     skrll {
   2981   1.1     skrll   asection *stub_sec;
   2982   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_hash_table *table;
   2983   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   2984   1.1     skrll 
   2985   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2986   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2987  1.14  christos     return false;
   2988   1.1     skrll 
   2989   1.1     skrll   for (stub_sec = htab->stub_bfd->sections;
   2990   1.1     skrll        stub_sec != NULL;
   2991   1.1     skrll        stub_sec = stub_sec->next)
   2992  1.10  christos     if ((stub_sec->flags & SEC_LINKER_CREATED) == 0
   2993  1.10  christos 	&& stub_sec->size != 0)
   2994  1.10  christos       {
   2995  1.10  christos 	/* Allocate memory to hold the linker stubs.  */
   2996  1.10  christos 	stub_sec->contents = bfd_zalloc (htab->stub_bfd, stub_sec->size);
   2997  1.10  christos 	if (stub_sec->contents == NULL)
   2998  1.14  christos 	  return false;
   2999  1.10  christos 	stub_sec->size = 0;
   3000  1.10  christos       }
   3001   1.1     skrll 
   3002   1.1     skrll   /* Build the stubs as directed by the stub hash table.  */
   3003   1.1     skrll   table = &htab->bstab;
   3004   1.1     skrll   bfd_hash_traverse (table, hppa_build_one_stub, info);
   3005   1.1     skrll 
   3006  1.14  christos   return true;
   3007   1.1     skrll }
   3008   1.1     skrll 
   3009   1.1     skrll /* Return the base vma address which should be subtracted from the real
   3010   1.7  christos    address when resolving a dtpoff relocation.
   3011   1.1     skrll    This is PT_TLS segment p_vaddr.  */
   3012   1.1     skrll 
   3013   1.1     skrll static bfd_vma
   3014   1.1     skrll dtpoff_base (struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3015   1.1     skrll {
   3016   1.1     skrll   /* If tls_sec is NULL, we should have signalled an error already.  */
   3017   1.1     skrll   if (elf_hash_table (info)->tls_sec == NULL)
   3018   1.1     skrll     return 0;
   3019   1.1     skrll   return elf_hash_table (info)->tls_sec->vma;
   3020   1.1     skrll }
   3021   1.1     skrll 
   3022   1.1     skrll /* Return the relocation value for R_PARISC_TLS_TPOFF*..  */
   3023   1.1     skrll 
   3024   1.1     skrll static bfd_vma
   3025   1.1     skrll tpoff (struct bfd_link_info *info, bfd_vma address)
   3026   1.1     skrll {
   3027   1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_table *htab = elf_hash_table (info);
   3028   1.1     skrll 
   3029   1.1     skrll   /* If tls_sec is NULL, we should have signalled an error already.  */
   3030   1.1     skrll   if (htab->tls_sec == NULL)
   3031   1.1     skrll     return 0;
   3032   1.7  christos   /* hppa TLS ABI is variant I and static TLS block start just after
   3033   1.1     skrll      tcbhead structure which has 2 pointer fields.  */
   3034   1.7  christos   return (address - htab->tls_sec->vma
   3035   1.1     skrll 	  + align_power ((bfd_vma) 8, htab->tls_sec->alignment_power));
   3036   1.1     skrll }
   3037   1.1     skrll 
   3038   1.1     skrll /* Perform a final link.  */
   3039   1.1     skrll 
   3040  1.14  christos static bool
   3041   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_final_link (bfd *abfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3042   1.1     skrll {
   3043   1.9  christos   struct stat buf;
   3044   1.9  christos 
   3045   1.1     skrll   /* Invoke the regular ELF linker to do all the work.  */
   3046   1.1     skrll   if (!bfd_elf_final_link (abfd, info))
   3047  1.14  christos     return false;
   3048   1.1     skrll 
   3049   1.1     skrll   /* If we're producing a final executable, sort the contents of the
   3050   1.1     skrll      unwind section.  */
   3051   1.7  christos   if (bfd_link_relocatable (info))
   3052  1.14  christos     return true;
   3053   1.3  christos 
   3054   1.9  christos   /* Do not attempt to sort non-regular files.  This is here
   3055   1.9  christos      especially for configure scripts and kernel builds which run
   3056   1.9  christos      tests with "ld [...] -o /dev/null".  */
   3057  1.14  christos   if (stat (bfd_get_filename (abfd), &buf) != 0
   3058   1.9  christos       || !S_ISREG(buf.st_mode))
   3059  1.14  christos     return true;
   3060   1.9  christos 
   3061   1.1     skrll   return elf_hppa_sort_unwind (abfd);
   3062   1.1     skrll }
   3063   1.1     skrll 
   3064   1.1     skrll /* Record the lowest address for the data and text segments.  */
   3065   1.1     skrll 
   3066   1.1     skrll static void
   3067   1.1     skrll hppa_record_segment_addr (bfd *abfd, asection *section, void *data)
   3068   1.1     skrll {
   3069   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   3070   1.1     skrll 
   3071   1.1     skrll   htab = (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table*) data;
   3072   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   3073   1.3  christos     return;
   3074   1.1     skrll 
   3075   1.1     skrll   if ((section->flags & (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD)) == (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD))
   3076   1.1     skrll     {
   3077   1.1     skrll       bfd_vma value;
   3078   1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Phdr *p;
   3079   1.1     skrll 
   3080   1.1     skrll       p = _bfd_elf_find_segment_containing_section (abfd, section->output_section);
   3081   1.1     skrll       BFD_ASSERT (p != NULL);
   3082   1.1     skrll       value = p->p_vaddr;
   3083   1.1     skrll 
   3084   1.1     skrll       if ((section->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   3085   1.1     skrll 	{
   3086   1.1     skrll 	  if (value < htab->text_segment_base)
   3087   1.1     skrll 	    htab->text_segment_base = value;
   3088   1.1     skrll 	}
   3089   1.1     skrll       else
   3090   1.1     skrll 	{
   3091   1.1     skrll 	  if (value < htab->data_segment_base)
   3092   1.1     skrll 	    htab->data_segment_base = value;
   3093   1.1     skrll 	}
   3094   1.1     skrll     }
   3095   1.1     skrll }
   3096   1.1     skrll 
   3097   1.1     skrll /* Perform a relocation as part of a final link.  */
   3098   1.1     skrll 
   3099   1.1     skrll static bfd_reloc_status_type
   3100   1.1     skrll final_link_relocate (asection *input_section,
   3101   1.1     skrll 		     bfd_byte *contents,
   3102   1.1     skrll 		     const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela,
   3103   1.1     skrll 		     bfd_vma value,
   3104   1.1     skrll 		     struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab,
   3105   1.1     skrll 		     asection *sym_sec,
   3106   1.1     skrll 		     struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh,
   3107   1.1     skrll 		     struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3108   1.1     skrll {
   3109  1.13  christos   unsigned int insn;
   3110   1.1     skrll   unsigned int r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info);
   3111   1.1     skrll   unsigned int orig_r_type = r_type;
   3112   1.1     skrll   reloc_howto_type *howto = elf_hppa_howto_table + r_type;
   3113   1.1     skrll   int r_format = howto->bitsize;
   3114   1.1     skrll   enum hppa_reloc_field_selector_type_alt r_field;
   3115   1.1     skrll   bfd *input_bfd = input_section->owner;
   3116   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma offset = rela->r_offset;
   3117   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma max_branch_offset = 0;
   3118   1.1     skrll   bfd_byte *hit_data = contents + offset;
   3119   1.1     skrll   bfd_signed_vma addend = rela->r_addend;
   3120   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma location;
   3121   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh = NULL;
   3122   1.7  christos   int val;
   3123   1.1     skrll 
   3124   1.1     skrll   if (r_type == R_PARISC_NONE)
   3125   1.1     skrll     return bfd_reloc_ok;
   3126   1.1     skrll 
   3127   1.1     skrll   insn = bfd_get_32 (input_bfd, hit_data);
   3128   1.1     skrll 
   3129   1.1     skrll   /* Find out where we are and where we're going.  */
   3130   1.1     skrll   location = (offset +
   3131   1.1     skrll 	      input_section->output_offset +
   3132   1.1     skrll 	      input_section->output_section->vma);
   3133   1.1     skrll 
   3134   1.1     skrll   /* If we are not building a shared library, convert DLTIND relocs to
   3135   1.1     skrll      DPREL relocs.  */
   3136   1.7  christos   if (!bfd_link_pic (info))
   3137   1.1     skrll     {
   3138   1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
   3139   1.1     skrll 	{
   3140   1.1     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   3141   1.5     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   3142   1.5     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   3143   1.5     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   3144   1.1     skrll 	    r_type = R_PARISC_DPREL21L;
   3145   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   3146   1.1     skrll 
   3147   1.1     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   3148   1.5     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   3149   1.5     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   3150   1.5     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   3151   1.1     skrll 	    r_type = R_PARISC_DPREL14R;
   3152   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   3153   1.1     skrll 
   3154   1.1     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   3155   1.1     skrll 	    r_type = R_PARISC_DPREL14F;
   3156   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   3157   1.1     skrll 	}
   3158   1.1     skrll     }
   3159   1.1     skrll 
   3160   1.1     skrll   switch (r_type)
   3161   1.1     skrll     {
   3162   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL12F:
   3163   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17F:
   3164   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL22F:
   3165   1.1     skrll       /* If this call should go via the plt, find the import stub in
   3166   1.1     skrll 	 the stub hash.  */
   3167   1.1     skrll       if (sym_sec == NULL
   3168   1.1     skrll 	  || sym_sec->output_section == NULL
   3169   1.1     skrll 	  || (hh != NULL
   3170   1.1     skrll 	      && hh->eh.plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1
   3171   1.1     skrll 	      && hh->eh.dynindx != -1
   3172   1.1     skrll 	      && !hh->plabel
   3173   1.7  christos 	      && (bfd_link_pic (info)
   3174   1.1     skrll 		  || !hh->eh.def_regular
   3175   1.1     skrll 		  || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)))
   3176   1.1     skrll 	{
   3177   1.1     skrll 	  hsh = hppa_get_stub_entry (input_section, sym_sec,
   3178  1.12  christos 				     hh, rela, htab);
   3179   1.1     skrll 	  if (hsh != NULL)
   3180   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3181   1.1     skrll 	      value = (hsh->stub_offset
   3182   1.1     skrll 		       + hsh->stub_sec->output_offset
   3183   1.1     skrll 		       + hsh->stub_sec->output_section->vma);
   3184   1.1     skrll 	      addend = 0;
   3185   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3186   1.1     skrll 	  else if (sym_sec == NULL && hh != NULL
   3187   1.1     skrll 		   && hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   3188   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3189   1.1     skrll 	      /* It's OK if undefined weak.  Calls to undefined weak
   3190   1.1     skrll 		 symbols behave as if the "called" function
   3191   1.1     skrll 		 immediately returns.  We can thus call to a weak
   3192   1.1     skrll 		 function without first checking whether the function
   3193   1.1     skrll 		 is defined.  */
   3194   1.1     skrll 	      value = location;
   3195   1.1     skrll 	      addend = 8;
   3196   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3197   1.1     skrll 	  else
   3198   1.1     skrll 	    return bfd_reloc_undefined;
   3199   1.1     skrll 	}
   3200   1.1     skrll       /* Fall thru.  */
   3201   1.1     skrll 
   3202   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL21L:
   3203   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17C:
   3204   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17R:
   3205   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL14R:
   3206   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL14F:
   3207   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL32:
   3208   1.1     skrll       /* Make it a pc relative offset.  */
   3209   1.1     skrll       value -= location;
   3210   1.1     skrll       addend -= 8;
   3211   1.1     skrll       break;
   3212   1.1     skrll 
   3213   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL21L:
   3214   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL14R:
   3215   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL14F:
   3216   1.1     skrll       /* Convert instructions that use the linkage table pointer (r19) to
   3217   1.1     skrll 	 instructions that use the global data pointer (dp).  This is the
   3218   1.1     skrll 	 most efficient way of using PIC code in an incomplete executable,
   3219   1.1     skrll 	 but the user must follow the standard runtime conventions for
   3220   1.1     skrll 	 accessing data for this to work.  */
   3221   1.5     skrll       if (orig_r_type != r_type)
   3222   1.1     skrll 	{
   3223   1.5     skrll 	  if (r_type == R_PARISC_DPREL21L)
   3224   1.5     skrll 	    {
   3225   1.5     skrll 	      /* GCC sometimes uses a register other than r19 for the
   3226   1.5     skrll 		 operation, so we must convert any addil instruction
   3227   1.5     skrll 		 that uses this relocation.  */
   3228  1.13  christos 	      if ((insn & 0xfc000000) == OP_ADDIL << 26)
   3229   1.5     skrll 		insn = ADDIL_DP;
   3230   1.5     skrll 	      else
   3231   1.5     skrll 		/* We must have a ldil instruction.  It's too hard to find
   3232   1.5     skrll 		   and convert the associated add instruction, so issue an
   3233   1.5     skrll 		   error.  */
   3234  1.11  christos 		_bfd_error_handler
   3235  1.11  christos 		  /* xgettext:c-format */
   3236  1.12  christos 		  (_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): %s fixup for insn %#x "
   3237  1.12  christos 		     "is not supported in a non-shared link"),
   3238   1.5     skrll 		   input_bfd,
   3239   1.5     skrll 		   input_section,
   3240  1.12  christos 		   (uint64_t) offset,
   3241   1.5     skrll 		   howto->name,
   3242   1.5     skrll 		   insn);
   3243   1.5     skrll 	    }
   3244   1.5     skrll 	  else if (r_type == R_PARISC_DPREL14F)
   3245   1.5     skrll 	    {
   3246   1.5     skrll 	      /* This must be a format 1 load/store.  Change the base
   3247   1.5     skrll 		 register to dp.  */
   3248   1.5     skrll 	      insn = (insn & 0xfc1ffff) | (27 << 21);
   3249   1.5     skrll 	    }
   3250   1.5     skrll 	}
   3251   1.5     skrll 
   3252   1.5     skrll       /* For all the DP relative relocations, we need to examine the symbol's
   3253   1.5     skrll 	 section.  If it has no section or if it's a code section, then
   3254   1.5     skrll 	 "data pointer relative" makes no sense.  In that case we don't
   3255   1.5     skrll 	 adjust the "value", and for 21 bit addil instructions, we change the
   3256   1.5     skrll 	 source addend register from %dp to %r0.  This situation commonly
   3257   1.5     skrll 	 arises for undefined weak symbols and when a variable's "constness"
   3258   1.5     skrll 	 is declared differently from the way the variable is defined.  For
   3259   1.5     skrll 	 instance: "extern int foo" with foo defined as "const int foo".  */
   3260   1.1     skrll       if (sym_sec == NULL || (sym_sec->flags & SEC_CODE) != 0)
   3261   1.1     skrll 	{
   3262  1.13  christos 	  if ((insn & ((0x3fu << 26) | (0x1f << 21)))
   3263  1.13  christos 	      == ((OP_ADDIL << 26) | (27 << 21)))
   3264   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3265   1.1     skrll 	      insn &= ~ (0x1f << 21);
   3266   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3267   1.1     skrll 	  /* Now try to make things easy for the dynamic linker.  */
   3268   1.1     skrll 
   3269   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3270   1.1     skrll 	}
   3271   1.1     skrll       /* Fall thru.  */
   3272   1.1     skrll 
   3273   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   3274   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   3275   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   3276   1.4     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   3277   1.5     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   3278   1.5     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   3279   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   3280   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   3281   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   3282   1.1     skrll       value -= elf_gp (input_section->output_section->owner);
   3283   1.1     skrll       break;
   3284   1.1     skrll 
   3285   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_SEGREL32:
   3286   1.1     skrll       if ((sym_sec->flags & SEC_CODE) != 0)
   3287   1.1     skrll 	value -= htab->text_segment_base;
   3288   1.1     skrll       else
   3289   1.1     skrll 	value -= htab->data_segment_base;
   3290   1.1     skrll       break;
   3291   1.1     skrll 
   3292   1.1     skrll     default:
   3293   1.1     skrll       break;
   3294   1.1     skrll     }
   3295   1.1     skrll 
   3296   1.1     skrll   switch (r_type)
   3297   1.1     skrll     {
   3298   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR32:
   3299   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR14F:
   3300   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR17F:
   3301   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17C:
   3302   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL14F:
   3303   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL32:
   3304   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL14F:
   3305   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PLABEL32:
   3306   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   3307   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_SEGBASE:
   3308   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_SEGREL32:
   3309   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32:
   3310   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_DTPOFF32:
   3311   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_TPREL32:
   3312   1.1     skrll       r_field = e_fsel;
   3313   1.1     skrll       break;
   3314   1.1     skrll 
   3315   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   3316   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL21L:
   3317   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PLABEL21L:
   3318   1.1     skrll       r_field = e_lsel;
   3319   1.1     skrll       break;
   3320   1.1     skrll 
   3321   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR21L:
   3322   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL21L:
   3323   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   3324   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   3325   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDO21L:
   3326   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   3327   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LE21L:
   3328   1.1     skrll       r_field = e_lrsel;
   3329   1.1     skrll       break;
   3330   1.1     skrll 
   3331   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17R:
   3332   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL14R:
   3333   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PLABEL14R:
   3334   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   3335   1.1     skrll       r_field = e_rsel;
   3336   1.1     skrll       break;
   3337   1.1     skrll 
   3338   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR17R:
   3339   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR14R:
   3340   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL14R:
   3341   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   3342   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   3343   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDO14R:
   3344   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   3345   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LE14R:
   3346   1.1     skrll       r_field = e_rrsel;
   3347   1.1     skrll       break;
   3348   1.1     skrll 
   3349   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL12F:
   3350   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17F:
   3351   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL22F:
   3352   1.1     skrll       r_field = e_fsel;
   3353   1.1     skrll 
   3354   1.1     skrll       if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL17F)
   3355   1.1     skrll 	{
   3356   1.1     skrll 	  max_branch_offset = (1 << (17-1)) << 2;
   3357   1.1     skrll 	}
   3358   1.1     skrll       else if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL12F)
   3359   1.1     skrll 	{
   3360   1.1     skrll 	  max_branch_offset = (1 << (12-1)) << 2;
   3361   1.1     skrll 	}
   3362   1.1     skrll       else
   3363   1.1     skrll 	{
   3364   1.1     skrll 	  max_branch_offset = (1 << (22-1)) << 2;
   3365   1.1     skrll 	}
   3366   1.1     skrll 
   3367   1.1     skrll       /* sym_sec is NULL on undefined weak syms or when shared on
   3368   1.1     skrll 	 undefined syms.  We've already checked for a stub for the
   3369   1.1     skrll 	 shared undefined case.  */
   3370   1.1     skrll       if (sym_sec == NULL)
   3371   1.1     skrll 	break;
   3372   1.1     skrll 
   3373   1.1     skrll       /* If the branch is out of reach, then redirect the
   3374   1.1     skrll 	 call to the local stub for this function.  */
   3375   1.1     skrll       if (value + addend + max_branch_offset >= 2*max_branch_offset)
   3376   1.1     skrll 	{
   3377   1.1     skrll 	  hsh = hppa_get_stub_entry (input_section, sym_sec,
   3378  1.12  christos 				     hh, rela, htab);
   3379   1.1     skrll 	  if (hsh == NULL)
   3380   1.1     skrll 	    return bfd_reloc_undefined;
   3381   1.1     skrll 
   3382   1.1     skrll 	  /* Munge up the value and addend so that we call the stub
   3383   1.1     skrll 	     rather than the procedure directly.  */
   3384   1.1     skrll 	  value = (hsh->stub_offset
   3385   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->stub_sec->output_offset
   3386   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->stub_sec->output_section->vma
   3387   1.1     skrll 		   - location);
   3388   1.1     skrll 	  addend = -8;
   3389   1.1     skrll 	}
   3390   1.1     skrll       break;
   3391   1.1     skrll 
   3392   1.1     skrll     /* Something we don't know how to handle.  */
   3393   1.1     skrll     default:
   3394   1.1     skrll       return bfd_reloc_notsupported;
   3395   1.1     skrll     }
   3396   1.1     skrll 
   3397   1.1     skrll   /* Make sure we can reach the stub.  */
   3398   1.1     skrll   if (max_branch_offset != 0
   3399   1.1     skrll       && value + addend + max_branch_offset >= 2*max_branch_offset)
   3400   1.1     skrll     {
   3401  1.11  christos       _bfd_error_handler
   3402  1.11  christos 	/* xgettext:c-format */
   3403  1.12  christos 	(_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): cannot reach %s, "
   3404  1.12  christos 	   "recompile with -ffunction-sections"),
   3405   1.1     skrll 	 input_bfd,
   3406   1.1     skrll 	 input_section,
   3407  1.12  christos 	 (uint64_t) offset,
   3408   1.1     skrll 	 hsh->bh_root.string);
   3409   1.1     skrll       bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   3410   1.1     skrll       return bfd_reloc_notsupported;
   3411   1.1     skrll     }
   3412   1.1     skrll 
   3413   1.1     skrll   val = hppa_field_adjust (value, addend, r_field);
   3414   1.1     skrll 
   3415   1.1     skrll   switch (r_type)
   3416   1.1     skrll     {
   3417   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL12F:
   3418   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17C:
   3419   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17F:
   3420   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17R:
   3421   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL22F:
   3422   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR17F:
   3423   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR17R:
   3424   1.1     skrll       /* This is a branch.  Divide the offset by four.
   3425   1.1     skrll 	 Note that we need to decide whether it's a branch or
   3426   1.1     skrll 	 otherwise by inspecting the reloc.  Inspecting insn won't
   3427   1.1     skrll 	 work as insn might be from a .word directive.  */
   3428   1.1     skrll       val >>= 2;
   3429   1.1     skrll       break;
   3430   1.1     skrll 
   3431   1.1     skrll     default:
   3432   1.1     skrll       break;
   3433   1.1     skrll     }
   3434   1.1     skrll 
   3435   1.1     skrll   insn = hppa_rebuild_insn (insn, val, r_format);
   3436   1.1     skrll 
   3437   1.1     skrll   /* Update the instruction word.  */
   3438   1.1     skrll   bfd_put_32 (input_bfd, (bfd_vma) insn, hit_data);
   3439   1.1     skrll   return bfd_reloc_ok;
   3440   1.1     skrll }
   3441   1.1     skrll 
   3442   1.1     skrll /* Relocate an HPPA ELF section.  */
   3443   1.1     skrll 
   3444  1.14  christos static int
   3445   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_relocate_section (bfd *output_bfd,
   3446   1.1     skrll 			     struct bfd_link_info *info,
   3447   1.1     skrll 			     bfd *input_bfd,
   3448   1.1     skrll 			     asection *input_section,
   3449   1.1     skrll 			     bfd_byte *contents,
   3450   1.1     skrll 			     Elf_Internal_Rela *relocs,
   3451   1.1     skrll 			     Elf_Internal_Sym *local_syms,
   3452   1.1     skrll 			     asection **local_sections)
   3453   1.1     skrll {
   3454   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma *local_got_offsets;
   3455   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   3456   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   3457   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Rela *rela;
   3458   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Rela *relend;
   3459   1.1     skrll 
   3460   1.1     skrll   symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (input_bfd)->symtab_hdr;
   3461   1.1     skrll 
   3462   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   3463   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   3464  1.14  christos     return false;
   3465   1.3  christos 
   3466   1.1     skrll   local_got_offsets = elf_local_got_offsets (input_bfd);
   3467   1.1     skrll 
   3468   1.1     skrll   rela = relocs;
   3469   1.1     skrll   relend = relocs + input_section->reloc_count;
   3470   1.1     skrll   for (; rela < relend; rela++)
   3471   1.1     skrll     {
   3472   1.1     skrll       unsigned int r_type;
   3473   1.1     skrll       reloc_howto_type *howto;
   3474   1.1     skrll       unsigned int r_symndx;
   3475   1.1     skrll       struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   3476   1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Sym *sym;
   3477   1.1     skrll       asection *sym_sec;
   3478   1.1     skrll       bfd_vma relocation;
   3479   1.1     skrll       bfd_reloc_status_type rstatus;
   3480   1.1     skrll       const char *sym_name;
   3481  1.14  christos       bool plabel;
   3482  1.14  christos       bool warned_undef;
   3483   1.1     skrll 
   3484   1.1     skrll       r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info);
   3485   1.1     skrll       if (r_type >= (unsigned int) R_PARISC_UNIMPLEMENTED)
   3486   1.1     skrll 	{
   3487   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   3488  1.14  christos 	  return false;
   3489   1.1     skrll 	}
   3490   1.1     skrll       if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_GNU_VTENTRY
   3491   1.1     skrll 	  || r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_GNU_VTINHERIT)
   3492   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   3493   1.1     skrll 
   3494   1.1     skrll       r_symndx = ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info);
   3495   1.1     skrll       hh = NULL;
   3496   1.1     skrll       sym = NULL;
   3497   1.1     skrll       sym_sec = NULL;
   3498  1.14  christos       warned_undef = false;
   3499   1.1     skrll       if (r_symndx < symtab_hdr->sh_info)
   3500   1.1     skrll 	{
   3501   1.1     skrll 	  /* This is a local symbol, h defaults to NULL.  */
   3502   1.1     skrll 	  sym = local_syms + r_symndx;
   3503   1.1     skrll 	  sym_sec = local_sections[r_symndx];
   3504   1.1     skrll 	  relocation = _bfd_elf_rela_local_sym (output_bfd, sym, &sym_sec, rela);
   3505   1.1     skrll 	}
   3506   1.1     skrll       else
   3507   1.1     skrll 	{
   3508   1.1     skrll 	  struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh;
   3509  1.14  christos 	  bool unresolved_reloc, ignored;
   3510   1.1     skrll 	  struct elf_link_hash_entry **sym_hashes = elf_sym_hashes (input_bfd);
   3511   1.1     skrll 
   3512   1.1     skrll 	  RELOC_FOR_GLOBAL_SYMBOL (info, input_bfd, input_section, rela,
   3513   1.1     skrll 				   r_symndx, symtab_hdr, sym_hashes,
   3514   1.1     skrll 				   eh, sym_sec, relocation,
   3515   1.7  christos 				   unresolved_reloc, warned_undef,
   3516   1.7  christos 				   ignored);
   3517   1.1     skrll 
   3518   1.7  christos 	  if (!bfd_link_relocatable (info)
   3519   1.1     skrll 	      && relocation == 0
   3520   1.1     skrll 	      && eh->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defined
   3521   1.1     skrll 	      && eh->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defweak
   3522   1.1     skrll 	      && eh->root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   3523   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3524   1.1     skrll 	      if (info->unresolved_syms_in_objects == RM_IGNORE
   3525   1.1     skrll 		  && ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (eh->other) == STV_DEFAULT
   3526   1.1     skrll 		  && eh->type == STT_PARISC_MILLI)
   3527   1.1     skrll 		{
   3528  1.10  christos 		  (*info->callbacks->undefined_symbol)
   3529  1.10  christos 		    (info, eh_name (eh), input_bfd,
   3530  1.14  christos 		     input_section, rela->r_offset, false);
   3531  1.14  christos 		  warned_undef = true;
   3532   1.1     skrll 		}
   3533   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3534   1.1     skrll 	  hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   3535   1.1     skrll 	}
   3536   1.1     skrll 
   3537   1.6  christos       if (sym_sec != NULL && discarded_section (sym_sec))
   3538   1.3  christos 	RELOC_AGAINST_DISCARDED_SECTION (info, input_bfd, input_section,
   3539   1.6  christos 					 rela, 1, relend,
   3540   1.6  christos 					 elf_hppa_howto_table + r_type, 0,
   3541   1.3  christos 					 contents);
   3542   1.1     skrll 
   3543   1.7  christos       if (bfd_link_relocatable (info))
   3544   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   3545   1.1     skrll 
   3546   1.1     skrll       /* Do any required modifications to the relocation value, and
   3547   1.1     skrll 	 determine what types of dynamic info we need to output, if
   3548   1.1     skrll 	 any.  */
   3549   1.1     skrll       plabel = 0;
   3550   1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
   3551   1.1     skrll 	{
   3552   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   3553   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   3554   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   3555   1.1     skrll 	  {
   3556   1.1     skrll 	    bfd_vma off;
   3557  1.14  christos 	    bool do_got = false;
   3558  1.14  christos 	    bool reloc = bfd_link_pic (info);
   3559   1.1     skrll 
   3560   1.1     skrll 	    /* Relocation is to the entry for this symbol in the
   3561   1.1     skrll 	       global offset table.  */
   3562   1.1     skrll 	    if (hh != NULL)
   3563   1.1     skrll 	      {
   3564  1.14  christos 		bool dyn;
   3565   1.1     skrll 
   3566   1.1     skrll 		off = hh->eh.got.offset;
   3567   1.1     skrll 		dyn = htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created;
   3568  1.11  christos 		reloc = (!UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, &hh->eh)
   3569  1.11  christos 			 && (reloc
   3570  1.11  christos 			     || (hh->eh.dynindx != -1
   3571  1.11  christos 				 && !SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, &hh->eh))));
   3572  1.11  christos 		if (!reloc
   3573  1.11  christos 		    || !WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (dyn,
   3574  1.11  christos 							 bfd_link_pic (info),
   3575  1.11  christos 							 &hh->eh))
   3576   1.1     skrll 		  {
   3577   1.1     skrll 		    /* If we aren't going to call finish_dynamic_symbol,
   3578   1.1     skrll 		       then we need to handle initialisation of the .got
   3579   1.1     skrll 		       entry and create needed relocs here.  Since the
   3580   1.1     skrll 		       offset must always be a multiple of 4, we use the
   3581   1.1     skrll 		       least significant bit to record whether we have
   3582   1.1     skrll 		       initialised it already.  */
   3583   1.1     skrll 		    if ((off & 1) != 0)
   3584   1.1     skrll 		      off &= ~1;
   3585   1.1     skrll 		    else
   3586   1.1     skrll 		      {
   3587   1.1     skrll 			hh->eh.got.offset |= 1;
   3588  1.14  christos 			do_got = true;
   3589   1.1     skrll 		      }
   3590   1.1     skrll 		  }
   3591   1.1     skrll 	      }
   3592   1.1     skrll 	    else
   3593   1.1     skrll 	      {
   3594   1.1     skrll 		/* Local symbol case.  */
   3595   1.1     skrll 		if (local_got_offsets == NULL)
   3596   1.1     skrll 		  abort ();
   3597   1.1     skrll 
   3598   1.1     skrll 		off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx];
   3599   1.1     skrll 
   3600   1.1     skrll 		/* The offset must always be a multiple of 4.  We use
   3601   1.1     skrll 		   the least significant bit to record whether we have
   3602   1.1     skrll 		   already generated the necessary reloc.  */
   3603   1.1     skrll 		if ((off & 1) != 0)
   3604   1.1     skrll 		  off &= ~1;
   3605   1.1     skrll 		else
   3606   1.1     skrll 		  {
   3607   1.1     skrll 		    local_got_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1;
   3608  1.14  christos 		    do_got = true;
   3609   1.1     skrll 		  }
   3610   1.1     skrll 	      }
   3611   1.1     skrll 
   3612   1.1     skrll 	    if (do_got)
   3613   1.1     skrll 	      {
   3614  1.11  christos 		if (reloc)
   3615   1.1     skrll 		  {
   3616   1.1     skrll 		    /* Output a dynamic relocation for this GOT entry.
   3617   1.1     skrll 		       In this case it is relative to the base of the
   3618   1.1     skrll 		       object because the symbol index is zero.  */
   3619   1.1     skrll 		    Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   3620   1.1     skrll 		    bfd_byte *loc;
   3621  1.11  christos 		    asection *sec = htab->etab.srelgot;
   3622   1.1     skrll 
   3623   1.1     skrll 		    outrel.r_offset = (off
   3624  1.11  christos 				       + htab->etab.sgot->output_offset
   3625  1.11  christos 				       + htab->etab.sgot->output_section->vma);
   3626   1.1     skrll 		    outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_DIR32);
   3627   1.1     skrll 		    outrel.r_addend = relocation;
   3628   1.1     skrll 		    loc = sec->contents;
   3629   1.1     skrll 		    loc += sec->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   3630   1.1     skrll 		    bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   3631   1.1     skrll 		  }
   3632   1.1     skrll 		else
   3633   1.1     skrll 		  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, relocation,
   3634  1.11  christos 			      htab->etab.sgot->contents + off);
   3635   1.1     skrll 	      }
   3636   1.1     skrll 
   3637   1.1     skrll 	    if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2)
   3638   1.1     skrll 	      abort ();
   3639   1.1     skrll 
   3640   1.1     skrll 	    /* Add the base of the GOT to the relocation value.  */
   3641   1.1     skrll 	    relocation = (off
   3642  1.11  christos 			  + htab->etab.sgot->output_offset
   3643  1.11  christos 			  + htab->etab.sgot->output_section->vma);
   3644   1.1     skrll 	  }
   3645   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3646   1.1     skrll 
   3647   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_SEGREL32:
   3648   1.1     skrll 	  /* If this is the first SEGREL relocation, then initialize
   3649   1.1     skrll 	     the segment base values.  */
   3650   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->text_segment_base == (bfd_vma) -1)
   3651   1.1     skrll 	    bfd_map_over_sections (output_bfd, hppa_record_segment_addr, htab);
   3652   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3653   1.1     skrll 
   3654   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL14R:
   3655   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL21L:
   3656   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL32:
   3657   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   3658   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3659   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_vma off;
   3660  1.14  christos 	      bool do_plt = 0;
   3661   1.1     skrll 	      /* If we have a global symbol with a PLT slot, then
   3662   1.1     skrll 		 redirect this relocation to it.  */
   3663   1.1     skrll 	      if (hh != NULL)
   3664   1.1     skrll 		{
   3665   1.1     skrll 		  off = hh->eh.plt.offset;
   3666   1.7  christos 		  if (! WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (1,
   3667   1.7  christos 							 bfd_link_pic (info),
   3668   1.1     skrll 							 &hh->eh))
   3669   1.1     skrll 		    {
   3670  1.11  christos 		      /* In a non-shared link, adjust_dynamic_symbol
   3671   1.1     skrll 			 isn't called for symbols forced local.  We
   3672   1.1     skrll 			 need to write out the plt entry here.  */
   3673   1.1     skrll 		      if ((off & 1) != 0)
   3674   1.1     skrll 			off &= ~1;
   3675   1.1     skrll 		      else
   3676   1.1     skrll 			{
   3677   1.1     skrll 			  hh->eh.plt.offset |= 1;
   3678   1.1     skrll 			  do_plt = 1;
   3679   1.1     skrll 			}
   3680   1.1     skrll 		    }
   3681   1.1     skrll 		}
   3682   1.1     skrll 	      else
   3683   1.1     skrll 		{
   3684   1.1     skrll 		  bfd_vma *local_plt_offsets;
   3685   1.1     skrll 
   3686   1.1     skrll 		  if (local_got_offsets == NULL)
   3687   1.1     skrll 		    abort ();
   3688   1.1     skrll 
   3689   1.1     skrll 		  local_plt_offsets = local_got_offsets + symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   3690   1.1     skrll 		  off = local_plt_offsets[r_symndx];
   3691   1.1     skrll 
   3692   1.1     skrll 		  /* As for the local .got entry case, we use the last
   3693   1.1     skrll 		     bit to record whether we've already initialised
   3694   1.1     skrll 		     this local .plt entry.  */
   3695   1.1     skrll 		  if ((off & 1) != 0)
   3696   1.1     skrll 		    off &= ~1;
   3697   1.1     skrll 		  else
   3698   1.1     skrll 		    {
   3699   1.1     skrll 		      local_plt_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1;
   3700   1.1     skrll 		      do_plt = 1;
   3701   1.1     skrll 		    }
   3702   1.1     skrll 		}
   3703   1.1     skrll 
   3704   1.1     skrll 	      if (do_plt)
   3705   1.1     skrll 		{
   3706   1.7  christos 		  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   3707   1.1     skrll 		    {
   3708   1.1     skrll 		      /* Output a dynamic IPLT relocation for this
   3709   1.1     skrll 			 PLT entry.  */
   3710   1.1     skrll 		      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   3711   1.1     skrll 		      bfd_byte *loc;
   3712  1.11  christos 		      asection *s = htab->etab.srelplt;
   3713   1.1     skrll 
   3714   1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_offset = (off
   3715  1.11  christos 					 + htab->etab.splt->output_offset
   3716  1.11  christos 					 + htab->etab.splt->output_section->vma);
   3717   1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_IPLT);
   3718   1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_addend = relocation;
   3719   1.1     skrll 		      loc = s->contents;
   3720   1.1     skrll 		      loc += s->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   3721   1.1     skrll 		      bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   3722   1.1     skrll 		    }
   3723   1.1     skrll 		  else
   3724   1.1     skrll 		    {
   3725   1.1     skrll 		      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
   3726   1.1     skrll 				  relocation,
   3727  1.11  christos 				  htab->etab.splt->contents + off);
   3728   1.1     skrll 		      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
   3729  1.11  christos 				  elf_gp (htab->etab.splt->output_section->owner),
   3730  1.11  christos 				  htab->etab.splt->contents + off + 4);
   3731   1.1     skrll 		    }
   3732   1.1     skrll 		}
   3733   1.1     skrll 
   3734   1.1     skrll 	      if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2)
   3735   1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   3736   1.1     skrll 
   3737   1.1     skrll 	      /* PLABELs contain function pointers.  Relocation is to
   3738   1.1     skrll 		 the entry for the function in the .plt.  The magic +2
   3739   1.1     skrll 		 offset signals to $$dyncall that the function pointer
   3740   1.1     skrll 		 is in the .plt and thus has a gp pointer too.
   3741   1.1     skrll 		 Exception:  Undefined PLABELs should have a value of
   3742   1.1     skrll 		 zero.  */
   3743   1.1     skrll 	      if (hh == NULL
   3744   1.1     skrll 		  || (hh->eh.root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefweak
   3745   1.1     skrll 		      && hh->eh.root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefined))
   3746   1.1     skrll 		{
   3747   1.1     skrll 		  relocation = (off
   3748  1.11  christos 				+ htab->etab.splt->output_offset
   3749  1.11  christos 				+ htab->etab.splt->output_section->vma
   3750   1.1     skrll 				+ 2);
   3751   1.1     skrll 		}
   3752   1.1     skrll 	      plabel = 1;
   3753   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3754  1.11  christos 	  /* Fall through.  */
   3755   1.1     skrll 
   3756   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR17F:
   3757   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR17R:
   3758   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR14F:
   3759   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR14R:
   3760   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR21L:
   3761   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL14F:
   3762   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL14R:
   3763   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL21L:
   3764   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR32:
   3765   1.1     skrll 	  if ((input_section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) == 0)
   3766   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   3767   1.1     skrll 
   3768  1.11  christos 	  if (bfd_link_pic (info)
   3769  1.11  christos 	      ? ((hh == NULL
   3770  1.14  christos 		  || hh->eh.dyn_relocs != NULL)
   3771  1.11  christos 		 && ((hh != NULL && pc_dynrelocs (hh))
   3772  1.11  christos 		     || IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC (r_type)))
   3773  1.11  christos 	      : (hh != NULL
   3774  1.14  christos 		 && hh->eh.dyn_relocs != NULL))
   3775   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3776   1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   3777  1.14  christos 	      bool skip;
   3778   1.1     skrll 	      asection *sreloc;
   3779   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_byte *loc;
   3780   1.1     skrll 
   3781   1.1     skrll 	      /* When generating a shared object, these relocations
   3782   1.1     skrll 		 are copied into the output file to be resolved at run
   3783   1.1     skrll 		 time.  */
   3784   1.1     skrll 
   3785   1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_addend = rela->r_addend;
   3786   1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_offset =
   3787   1.1     skrll 		_bfd_elf_section_offset (output_bfd, info, input_section,
   3788   1.1     skrll 					 rela->r_offset);
   3789   1.1     skrll 	      skip = (outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -1
   3790   1.1     skrll 		      || outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -2);
   3791   1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_offset += (input_section->output_offset
   3792   1.1     skrll 				  + input_section->output_section->vma);
   3793   1.7  christos 
   3794   1.1     skrll 	      if (skip)
   3795   1.1     skrll 		{
   3796   1.1     skrll 		  memset (&outrel, 0, sizeof (outrel));
   3797   1.1     skrll 		}
   3798   1.1     skrll 	      else if (hh != NULL
   3799   1.1     skrll 		       && hh->eh.dynindx != -1
   3800   1.1     skrll 		       && (plabel
   3801   1.1     skrll 			   || !IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC (r_type)
   3802   1.7  christos 			   || !bfd_link_pic (info)
   3803   1.7  christos 			   || !SYMBOLIC_BIND (info, &hh->eh)
   3804   1.1     skrll 			   || !hh->eh.def_regular))
   3805   1.1     skrll 		{
   3806   1.1     skrll 		  outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (hh->eh.dynindx, r_type);
   3807   1.1     skrll 		}
   3808   1.1     skrll 	      else /* It's a local symbol, or one marked to become local.  */
   3809   1.1     skrll 		{
   3810   1.1     skrll 		  int indx = 0;
   3811   1.1     skrll 
   3812   1.1     skrll 		  /* Add the absolute offset of the symbol.  */
   3813   1.1     skrll 		  outrel.r_addend += relocation;
   3814   1.1     skrll 
   3815   1.1     skrll 		  /* Global plabels need to be processed by the
   3816   1.1     skrll 		     dynamic linker so that functions have at most one
   3817   1.1     skrll 		     fptr.  For this reason, we need to differentiate
   3818   1.1     skrll 		     between global and local plabels, which we do by
   3819   1.1     skrll 		     providing the function symbol for a global plabel
   3820   1.1     skrll 		     reloc, and no symbol for local plabels.  */
   3821   1.1     skrll 		  if (! plabel
   3822   1.1     skrll 		      && sym_sec != NULL
   3823   1.1     skrll 		      && sym_sec->output_section != NULL
   3824   1.1     skrll 		      && ! bfd_is_abs_section (sym_sec))
   3825   1.1     skrll 		    {
   3826   1.1     skrll 		      asection *osec;
   3827   1.1     skrll 
   3828   1.1     skrll 		      osec = sym_sec->output_section;
   3829   1.1     skrll 		      indx = elf_section_data (osec)->dynindx;
   3830   1.1     skrll 		      if (indx == 0)
   3831   1.1     skrll 			{
   3832   1.1     skrll 			  osec = htab->etab.text_index_section;
   3833   1.1     skrll 			  indx = elf_section_data (osec)->dynindx;
   3834   1.1     skrll 			}
   3835   1.1     skrll 		      BFD_ASSERT (indx != 0);
   3836   1.1     skrll 
   3837   1.1     skrll 		      /* We are turning this relocation into one
   3838   1.1     skrll 			 against a section symbol, so subtract out the
   3839   1.1     skrll 			 output section's address but not the offset
   3840   1.1     skrll 			 of the input section in the output section.  */
   3841   1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_addend -= osec->vma;
   3842   1.1     skrll 		    }
   3843   1.1     skrll 
   3844   1.1     skrll 		  outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (indx, r_type);
   3845   1.1     skrll 		}
   3846   1.1     skrll 	      sreloc = elf_section_data (input_section)->sreloc;
   3847   1.1     skrll 	      if (sreloc == NULL)
   3848   1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   3849   1.1     skrll 
   3850   1.1     skrll 	      loc = sreloc->contents;
   3851   1.1     skrll 	      loc += sreloc->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   3852   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   3853   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3854   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3855   1.7  christos 
   3856   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   3857   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   3858   1.1     skrll 	  {
   3859   1.1     skrll 	    bfd_vma off;
   3860   1.7  christos 
   3861   1.1     skrll 	    off = htab->tls_ldm_got.offset;
   3862   1.1     skrll 	    if (off & 1)
   3863   1.1     skrll 	      off &= ~1;
   3864   1.1     skrll 	    else
   3865   1.1     skrll 	      {
   3866   1.1     skrll 		Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   3867   1.1     skrll 		bfd_byte *loc;
   3868   1.1     skrll 
   3869   1.7  christos 		outrel.r_offset = (off
   3870  1.11  christos 				   + htab->etab.sgot->output_section->vma
   3871  1.11  christos 				   + htab->etab.sgot->output_offset);
   3872   1.1     skrll 		outrel.r_addend = 0;
   3873   1.1     skrll 		outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32);
   3874  1.11  christos 		loc = htab->etab.srelgot->contents;
   3875  1.11  christos 		loc += htab->etab.srelgot->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   3876   1.1     skrll 
   3877   1.1     skrll 		bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   3878   1.1     skrll 		htab->tls_ldm_got.offset |= 1;
   3879   1.1     skrll 	      }
   3880   1.1     skrll 
   3881   1.1     skrll 	    /* Add the base of the GOT to the relocation value.  */
   3882   1.1     skrll 	    relocation = (off
   3883  1.11  christos 			  + htab->etab.sgot->output_offset
   3884  1.11  christos 			  + htab->etab.sgot->output_section->vma);
   3885   1.1     skrll 
   3886   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   3887   1.1     skrll 	  }
   3888   1.1     skrll 
   3889   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDO21L:
   3890   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDO14R:
   3891   1.1     skrll 	  relocation -= dtpoff_base (info);
   3892   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3893   1.1     skrll 
   3894   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   3895   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   3896   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   3897   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   3898   1.1     skrll 	  {
   3899   1.1     skrll 	    bfd_vma off;
   3900   1.1     skrll 	    int indx;
   3901   1.1     skrll 	    char tls_type;
   3902   1.1     skrll 
   3903   1.1     skrll 	    indx = 0;
   3904   1.1     skrll 	    if (hh != NULL)
   3905   1.1     skrll 	      {
   3906  1.11  christos 		if (!htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created
   3907  1.11  christos 		    || hh->eh.dynindx == -1
   3908  1.11  christos 		    || SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, &hh->eh)
   3909  1.11  christos 		    || UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, &hh->eh))
   3910  1.11  christos 		  /* This is actually a static link, or it is a
   3911  1.11  christos 		     -Bsymbolic link and the symbol is defined
   3912  1.11  christos 		     locally, or the symbol was forced to be local
   3913  1.11  christos 		     because of a version file.  */
   3914  1.11  christos 		  ;
   3915  1.11  christos 		else
   3916  1.11  christos 		  indx = hh->eh.dynindx;
   3917   1.1     skrll 		off = hh->eh.got.offset;
   3918   1.1     skrll 		tls_type = hh->tls_type;
   3919   1.1     skrll 	      }
   3920   1.1     skrll 	    else
   3921   1.1     skrll 	      {
   3922   1.1     skrll 		off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx];
   3923   1.1     skrll 		tls_type = hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type (input_bfd)[r_symndx];
   3924   1.1     skrll 	      }
   3925   1.1     skrll 
   3926   1.1     skrll 	    if (tls_type == GOT_UNKNOWN)
   3927   1.1     skrll 	      abort ();
   3928   1.1     skrll 
   3929   1.1     skrll 	    if ((off & 1) != 0)
   3930   1.1     skrll 	      off &= ~1;
   3931   1.1     skrll 	    else
   3932   1.1     skrll 	      {
   3933  1.14  christos 		bool need_relocs = false;
   3934   1.1     skrll 		Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   3935   1.1     skrll 		bfd_byte *loc = NULL;
   3936   1.1     skrll 		int cur_off = off;
   3937   1.1     skrll 
   3938  1.11  christos 		/* The GOT entries have not been initialized yet.  Do it
   3939  1.11  christos 		   now, and emit any relocations.  If both an IE GOT and a
   3940  1.11  christos 		   GD GOT are necessary, we emit the GD first.  */
   3941  1.11  christos 
   3942  1.11  christos 		if (indx != 0
   3943  1.12  christos 		    || (bfd_link_dll (info)
   3944  1.11  christos 			&& (hh == NULL
   3945  1.11  christos 			    || !UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, &hh->eh))))
   3946   1.1     skrll 		  {
   3947  1.14  christos 		    need_relocs = true;
   3948  1.11  christos 		    loc = htab->etab.srelgot->contents;
   3949  1.11  christos 		    loc += (htab->etab.srelgot->reloc_count
   3950  1.11  christos 			    * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela));
   3951   1.1     skrll 		  }
   3952   1.1     skrll 
   3953   1.1     skrll 		if (tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD)
   3954   1.1     skrll 		  {
   3955   1.1     skrll 		    if (need_relocs)
   3956   1.1     skrll 		      {
   3957  1.11  christos 			outrel.r_offset
   3958  1.11  christos 			  = (cur_off
   3959  1.11  christos 			     + htab->etab.sgot->output_section->vma
   3960  1.11  christos 			     + htab->etab.sgot->output_offset);
   3961  1.11  christos 			outrel.r_info
   3962  1.11  christos 			  = ELF32_R_INFO (indx, R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32);
   3963   1.1     skrll 			outrel.r_addend = 0;
   3964   1.1     skrll 			bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   3965  1.11  christos 			htab->etab.srelgot->reloc_count++;
   3966   1.1     skrll 			loc += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   3967  1.12  christos 			bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0,
   3968  1.12  christos 				    htab->etab.sgot->contents + cur_off);
   3969  1.12  christos 		      }
   3970  1.12  christos 		    else
   3971  1.12  christos 		      /* If we are not emitting relocations for a
   3972  1.12  christos 			 general dynamic reference, then we must be in a
   3973  1.12  christos 			 static link or an executable link with the
   3974  1.12  christos 			 symbol binding locally.  Mark it as belonging
   3975  1.12  christos 			 to module 1, the executable.  */
   3976  1.12  christos 		      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 1,
   3977  1.12  christos 				  htab->etab.sgot->contents + cur_off);
   3978  1.12  christos 
   3979  1.12  christos 		    if (indx != 0)
   3980  1.12  christos 		      {
   3981  1.11  christos 			outrel.r_info
   3982  1.11  christos 			  = ELF32_R_INFO (indx, R_PARISC_TLS_DTPOFF32);
   3983  1.11  christos 			outrel.r_offset += 4;
   3984  1.11  christos 			bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   3985  1.11  christos 			htab->etab.srelgot->reloc_count++;
   3986  1.11  christos 			loc += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   3987  1.11  christos 			bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0,
   3988  1.11  christos 				    htab->etab.sgot->contents + cur_off + 4);
   3989   1.1     skrll 		      }
   3990   1.1     skrll 		    else
   3991  1.12  christos 		      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, relocation - dtpoff_base (info),
   3992  1.12  christos 				  htab->etab.sgot->contents + cur_off + 4);
   3993   1.1     skrll 		    cur_off += 8;
   3994   1.1     skrll 		  }
   3995   1.1     skrll 
   3996   1.1     skrll 		if (tls_type & GOT_TLS_IE)
   3997   1.1     skrll 		  {
   3998  1.11  christos 		    if (need_relocs
   3999  1.11  christos 			&& !(bfd_link_executable (info)
   4000  1.11  christos 			     && SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, &hh->eh)))
   4001   1.1     skrll 		      {
   4002  1.11  christos 			outrel.r_offset
   4003  1.11  christos 			  = (cur_off
   4004  1.11  christos 			     + htab->etab.sgot->output_section->vma
   4005  1.11  christos 			     + htab->etab.sgot->output_offset);
   4006  1.11  christos 			outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (indx,
   4007  1.11  christos 						      R_PARISC_TLS_TPREL32);
   4008   1.1     skrll 			if (indx == 0)
   4009   1.1     skrll 			  outrel.r_addend = relocation - dtpoff_base (info);
   4010   1.1     skrll 			else
   4011   1.1     skrll 			  outrel.r_addend = 0;
   4012   1.1     skrll 			bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   4013  1.11  christos 			htab->etab.srelgot->reloc_count++;
   4014   1.1     skrll 			loc += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4015   1.1     skrll 		      }
   4016   1.1     skrll 		    else
   4017   1.1     skrll 		      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, tpoff (info, relocation),
   4018  1.11  christos 				  htab->etab.sgot->contents + cur_off);
   4019   1.1     skrll 		    cur_off += 4;
   4020   1.1     skrll 		  }
   4021   1.1     skrll 
   4022   1.1     skrll 		if (hh != NULL)
   4023   1.1     skrll 		  hh->eh.got.offset |= 1;
   4024   1.1     skrll 		else
   4025   1.1     skrll 		  local_got_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1;
   4026   1.1     skrll 	      }
   4027   1.1     skrll 
   4028  1.11  christos 	    if ((tls_type & GOT_NORMAL) != 0
   4029  1.11  christos 		&& (tls_type & (GOT_TLS_GD | GOT_TLS_LDM | GOT_TLS_IE)) != 0)
   4030  1.11  christos 	      {
   4031  1.11  christos 		if (hh != NULL)
   4032  1.11  christos 		  _bfd_error_handler (_("%s has both normal and TLS relocs"),
   4033  1.11  christos 				      hh_name (hh));
   4034  1.11  christos 		else
   4035  1.11  christos 		  {
   4036  1.11  christos 		    Elf_Internal_Sym *isym
   4037  1.14  christos 		      = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->etab.sym_cache,
   4038  1.11  christos 					       input_bfd, r_symndx);
   4039  1.11  christos 		    if (isym == NULL)
   4040  1.14  christos 		      return false;
   4041  1.11  christos 		    sym_name
   4042  1.11  christos 		      = bfd_elf_string_from_elf_section (input_bfd,
   4043  1.11  christos 							 symtab_hdr->sh_link,
   4044  1.11  christos 							 isym->st_name);
   4045  1.11  christos 		    if (sym_name == NULL)
   4046  1.14  christos 		      return false;
   4047  1.11  christos 		    if (*sym_name == '\0')
   4048  1.13  christos 		      sym_name = bfd_section_name (sym_sec);
   4049  1.11  christos 		    _bfd_error_handler
   4050  1.12  christos 		      (_("%pB:%s has both normal and TLS relocs"),
   4051  1.11  christos 		       input_bfd, sym_name);
   4052  1.11  christos 		  }
   4053  1.11  christos 		bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   4054  1.14  christos 		return false;
   4055  1.11  christos 	      }
   4056  1.11  christos 
   4057   1.1     skrll 	    if ((tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD)
   4058  1.11  christos 		&& r_type != R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L
   4059  1.11  christos 		&& r_type != R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R)
   4060   1.1     skrll 	      off += 2 * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   4061   1.1     skrll 
   4062   1.1     skrll 	    /* Add the base of the GOT to the relocation value.  */
   4063   1.1     skrll 	    relocation = (off
   4064  1.11  christos 			  + htab->etab.sgot->output_offset
   4065  1.11  christos 			  + htab->etab.sgot->output_section->vma);
   4066   1.1     skrll 
   4067   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   4068   1.1     skrll 	  }
   4069   1.1     skrll 
   4070   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LE21L:
   4071   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LE14R:
   4072   1.1     skrll 	  {
   4073   1.1     skrll 	    relocation = tpoff (info, relocation);
   4074   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   4075   1.1     skrll 	  }
   4076   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   4077   1.1     skrll 
   4078   1.1     skrll 	default:
   4079   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   4080   1.1     skrll 	}
   4081   1.1     skrll 
   4082   1.1     skrll       rstatus = final_link_relocate (input_section, contents, rela, relocation,
   4083   1.1     skrll 			       htab, sym_sec, hh, info);
   4084   1.1     skrll 
   4085   1.1     skrll       if (rstatus == bfd_reloc_ok)
   4086   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   4087   1.1     skrll 
   4088   1.1     skrll       if (hh != NULL)
   4089   1.1     skrll 	sym_name = hh_name (hh);
   4090   1.1     skrll       else
   4091   1.1     skrll 	{
   4092   1.1     skrll 	  sym_name = bfd_elf_string_from_elf_section (input_bfd,
   4093   1.1     skrll 						      symtab_hdr->sh_link,
   4094   1.1     skrll 						      sym->st_name);
   4095   1.1     skrll 	  if (sym_name == NULL)
   4096  1.14  christos 	    return false;
   4097   1.1     skrll 	  if (*sym_name == '\0')
   4098  1.13  christos 	    sym_name = bfd_section_name (sym_sec);
   4099   1.1     skrll 	}
   4100   1.1     skrll 
   4101   1.1     skrll       howto = elf_hppa_howto_table + r_type;
   4102   1.1     skrll 
   4103   1.1     skrll       if (rstatus == bfd_reloc_undefined || rstatus == bfd_reloc_notsupported)
   4104   1.1     skrll 	{
   4105   1.1     skrll 	  if (rstatus == bfd_reloc_notsupported || !warned_undef)
   4106   1.1     skrll 	    {
   4107  1.11  christos 	      _bfd_error_handler
   4108  1.11  christos 		/* xgettext:c-format */
   4109  1.12  christos 		(_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): cannot handle %s for %s"),
   4110   1.1     skrll 		 input_bfd,
   4111   1.1     skrll 		 input_section,
   4112  1.12  christos 		 (uint64_t) rela->r_offset,
   4113   1.1     skrll 		 howto->name,
   4114   1.1     skrll 		 sym_name);
   4115   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   4116  1.14  christos 	      return false;
   4117   1.1     skrll 	    }
   4118   1.1     skrll 	}
   4119   1.1     skrll       else
   4120  1.10  christos 	(*info->callbacks->reloc_overflow)
   4121  1.10  christos 	  (info, (hh ? &hh->eh.root : NULL), sym_name, howto->name,
   4122  1.10  christos 	   (bfd_vma) 0, input_bfd, input_section, rela->r_offset);
   4123   1.1     skrll     }
   4124   1.1     skrll 
   4125  1.14  christos   return true;
   4126   1.1     skrll }
   4127   1.1     skrll 
   4128   1.1     skrll /* Finish up dynamic symbol handling.  We set the contents of various
   4129   1.1     skrll    dynamic sections here.  */
   4130   1.1     skrll 
   4131  1.14  christos static bool
   4132   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_symbol (bfd *output_bfd,
   4133   1.1     skrll 				  struct bfd_link_info *info,
   4134   1.1     skrll 				  struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh,
   4135   1.1     skrll 				  Elf_Internal_Sym *sym)
   4136   1.1     skrll {
   4137   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   4138   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Rela rela;
   4139   1.1     skrll   bfd_byte *loc;
   4140   1.1     skrll 
   4141   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   4142   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   4143  1.14  christos     return false;
   4144   1.1     skrll 
   4145   1.1     skrll   if (eh->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1)
   4146   1.1     skrll     {
   4147   1.1     skrll       bfd_vma value;
   4148   1.1     skrll 
   4149   1.1     skrll       if (eh->plt.offset & 1)
   4150   1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   4151   1.1     skrll 
   4152   1.1     skrll       /* This symbol has an entry in the procedure linkage table.  Set
   4153   1.1     skrll 	 it up.
   4154   1.1     skrll 
   4155   1.1     skrll 	 The format of a plt entry is
   4156   1.1     skrll 	 <funcaddr>
   4157   1.1     skrll 	 <__gp>
   4158   1.1     skrll       */
   4159   1.1     skrll       value = 0;
   4160   1.1     skrll       if (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   4161   1.1     skrll 	  || eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)
   4162   1.1     skrll 	{
   4163   1.1     skrll 	  value = eh->root.u.def.value;
   4164   1.1     skrll 	  if (eh->root.u.def.section->output_section != NULL)
   4165   1.1     skrll 	    value += (eh->root.u.def.section->output_offset
   4166   1.1     skrll 		      + eh->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma);
   4167   1.1     skrll 	}
   4168   1.1     skrll 
   4169   1.1     skrll       /* Create a dynamic IPLT relocation for this entry.  */
   4170   1.1     skrll       rela.r_offset = (eh->plt.offset
   4171  1.11  christos 		      + htab->etab.splt->output_offset
   4172  1.11  christos 		      + htab->etab.splt->output_section->vma);
   4173   1.1     skrll       if (eh->dynindx != -1)
   4174   1.1     skrll 	{
   4175   1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (eh->dynindx, R_PARISC_IPLT);
   4176   1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_addend = 0;
   4177   1.1     skrll 	}
   4178   1.1     skrll       else
   4179   1.1     skrll 	{
   4180   1.1     skrll 	  /* This symbol has been marked to become local, and is
   4181   1.1     skrll 	     used by a plabel so must be kept in the .plt.  */
   4182   1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_IPLT);
   4183   1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_addend = value;
   4184   1.1     skrll 	}
   4185   1.1     skrll 
   4186  1.11  christos       loc = htab->etab.srelplt->contents;
   4187  1.11  christos       loc += htab->etab.srelplt->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4188  1.11  christos       bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (htab->etab.splt->output_section->owner, &rela, loc);
   4189   1.1     skrll 
   4190   1.1     skrll       if (!eh->def_regular)
   4191   1.1     skrll 	{
   4192   1.1     skrll 	  /* Mark the symbol as undefined, rather than as defined in
   4193   1.1     skrll 	     the .plt section.  Leave the value alone.  */
   4194   1.1     skrll 	  sym->st_shndx = SHN_UNDEF;
   4195   1.1     skrll 	}
   4196   1.1     skrll     }
   4197   1.1     skrll 
   4198   1.1     skrll   if (eh->got.offset != (bfd_vma) -1
   4199  1.11  christos       && (hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh)->tls_type & GOT_NORMAL) != 0
   4200  1.11  christos       && !UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, eh))
   4201   1.1     skrll     {
   4202  1.14  christos       bool is_dyn = (eh->dynindx != -1
   4203  1.14  christos 		     && !SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, eh));
   4204   1.1     skrll 
   4205  1.11  christos       if (is_dyn || bfd_link_pic (info))
   4206   1.1     skrll 	{
   4207  1.11  christos 	  /* This symbol has an entry in the global offset table.  Set
   4208  1.11  christos 	     it up.  */
   4209  1.11  christos 
   4210  1.11  christos 	  rela.r_offset = ((eh->got.offset &~ (bfd_vma) 1)
   4211  1.11  christos 			   + htab->etab.sgot->output_offset
   4212  1.11  christos 			   + htab->etab.sgot->output_section->vma);
   4213  1.11  christos 
   4214  1.11  christos 	  /* If this is a -Bsymbolic link and the symbol is defined
   4215  1.11  christos 	     locally or was forced to be local because of a version
   4216  1.11  christos 	     file, we just want to emit a RELATIVE reloc.  The entry
   4217  1.11  christos 	     in the global offset table will already have been
   4218  1.11  christos 	     initialized in the relocate_section function.  */
   4219  1.15  christos 	  if (!is_dyn
   4220  1.15  christos 	      && (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   4221  1.15  christos 		  || eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak))
   4222  1.11  christos 	    {
   4223  1.11  christos 	      rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_DIR32);
   4224  1.11  christos 	      rela.r_addend = (eh->root.u.def.value
   4225  1.11  christos 			       + eh->root.u.def.section->output_offset
   4226  1.11  christos 			       + eh->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma);
   4227  1.11  christos 	    }
   4228  1.11  christos 	  else
   4229  1.11  christos 	    {
   4230  1.11  christos 	      if ((eh->got.offset & 1) != 0)
   4231  1.11  christos 		abort ();
   4232  1.11  christos 
   4233  1.11  christos 	      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0,
   4234  1.11  christos 			  htab->etab.sgot->contents + (eh->got.offset & ~1));
   4235  1.11  christos 	      rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (eh->dynindx, R_PARISC_DIR32);
   4236  1.11  christos 	      rela.r_addend = 0;
   4237  1.11  christos 	    }
   4238   1.1     skrll 
   4239  1.11  christos 	  loc = htab->etab.srelgot->contents;
   4240  1.11  christos 	  loc += (htab->etab.srelgot->reloc_count++
   4241  1.11  christos 		  * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela));
   4242  1.11  christos 	  bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
   4243   1.1     skrll 	}
   4244   1.1     skrll     }
   4245   1.1     skrll 
   4246   1.1     skrll   if (eh->needs_copy)
   4247   1.1     skrll     {
   4248   1.1     skrll       asection *sec;
   4249   1.1     skrll 
   4250   1.1     skrll       /* This symbol needs a copy reloc.  Set it up.  */
   4251   1.1     skrll 
   4252   1.1     skrll       if (! (eh->dynindx != -1
   4253   1.1     skrll 	     && (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   4254   1.1     skrll 		 || eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)))
   4255   1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   4256   1.1     skrll 
   4257   1.1     skrll       rela.r_offset = (eh->root.u.def.value
   4258   1.1     skrll 		      + eh->root.u.def.section->output_offset
   4259   1.1     skrll 		      + eh->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma);
   4260   1.1     skrll       rela.r_addend = 0;
   4261   1.1     skrll       rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (eh->dynindx, R_PARISC_COPY);
   4262  1.11  christos       if (eh->root.u.def.section == htab->etab.sdynrelro)
   4263  1.11  christos 	sec = htab->etab.sreldynrelro;
   4264  1.11  christos       else
   4265  1.11  christos 	sec = htab->etab.srelbss;
   4266   1.1     skrll       loc = sec->contents + sec->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4267   1.1     skrll       bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
   4268   1.1     skrll     }
   4269   1.1     skrll 
   4270   1.1     skrll   /* Mark _DYNAMIC and _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ as absolute.  */
   4271   1.7  christos   if (eh == htab->etab.hdynamic || eh == htab->etab.hgot)
   4272   1.1     skrll     {
   4273   1.1     skrll       sym->st_shndx = SHN_ABS;
   4274   1.1     skrll     }
   4275   1.1     skrll 
   4276  1.14  christos   return true;
   4277   1.1     skrll }
   4278   1.1     skrll 
   4279   1.1     skrll /* Used to decide how to sort relocs in an optimal manner for the
   4280   1.1     skrll    dynamic linker, before writing them out.  */
   4281   1.1     skrll 
   4282   1.1     skrll static enum elf_reloc_type_class
   4283   1.7  christos elf32_hppa_reloc_type_class (const struct bfd_link_info *info ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   4284   1.7  christos 			     const asection *rel_sec ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   4285   1.7  christos 			     const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela)
   4286   1.1     skrll {
   4287   1.1     skrll   /* Handle TLS relocs first; we don't want them to be marked
   4288   1.3  christos      relative by the "if (ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info) == STN_UNDEF)"
   4289   1.1     skrll      check below.  */
   4290   1.1     skrll   switch ((int) ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info))
   4291   1.1     skrll     {
   4292   1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32:
   4293   1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_TLS_DTPOFF32:
   4294   1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_TLS_TPREL32:
   4295  1.11  christos 	return reloc_class_normal;
   4296   1.1     skrll     }
   4297   1.1     skrll 
   4298   1.3  christos   if (ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info) == STN_UNDEF)
   4299   1.1     skrll     return reloc_class_relative;
   4300   1.1     skrll 
   4301   1.1     skrll   switch ((int) ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info))
   4302   1.1     skrll     {
   4303   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_IPLT:
   4304   1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_plt;
   4305   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_COPY:
   4306   1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_copy;
   4307   1.1     skrll     default:
   4308   1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_normal;
   4309   1.1     skrll     }
   4310   1.1     skrll }
   4311   1.1     skrll 
   4312   1.1     skrll /* Finish up the dynamic sections.  */
   4313   1.1     skrll 
   4314  1.14  christos static bool
   4315   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_sections (bfd *output_bfd,
   4316   1.1     skrll 				    struct bfd_link_info *info)
   4317   1.1     skrll {
   4318   1.1     skrll   bfd *dynobj;
   4319   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   4320   1.1     skrll   asection *sdyn;
   4321   1.6  christos   asection * sgot;
   4322   1.1     skrll 
   4323   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   4324   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   4325  1.14  christos     return false;
   4326   1.3  christos 
   4327   1.1     skrll   dynobj = htab->etab.dynobj;
   4328   1.1     skrll 
   4329  1.11  christos   sgot = htab->etab.sgot;
   4330   1.6  christos   /* A broken linker script might have discarded the dynamic sections.
   4331   1.6  christos      Catch this here so that we do not seg-fault later on.  */
   4332   1.6  christos   if (sgot != NULL && bfd_is_abs_section (sgot->output_section))
   4333  1.14  christos     return false;
   4334   1.6  christos 
   4335   1.6  christos   sdyn = bfd_get_linker_section (dynobj, ".dynamic");
   4336   1.1     skrll 
   4337   1.1     skrll   if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   4338   1.1     skrll     {
   4339   1.1     skrll       Elf32_External_Dyn *dyncon, *dynconend;
   4340   1.1     skrll 
   4341   1.1     skrll       if (sdyn == NULL)
   4342   1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   4343   1.1     skrll 
   4344   1.1     skrll       dyncon = (Elf32_External_Dyn *) sdyn->contents;
   4345   1.1     skrll       dynconend = (Elf32_External_Dyn *) (sdyn->contents + sdyn->size);
   4346   1.1     skrll       for (; dyncon < dynconend; dyncon++)
   4347   1.1     skrll 	{
   4348   1.1     skrll 	  Elf_Internal_Dyn dyn;
   4349   1.1     skrll 	  asection *s;
   4350   1.1     skrll 
   4351   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_elf32_swap_dyn_in (dynobj, dyncon, &dyn);
   4352   1.1     skrll 
   4353   1.1     skrll 	  switch (dyn.d_tag)
   4354   1.1     skrll 	    {
   4355   1.1     skrll 	    default:
   4356   1.1     skrll 	      continue;
   4357   1.1     skrll 
   4358   1.1     skrll 	    case DT_PLTGOT:
   4359   1.1     skrll 	      /* Use PLTGOT to set the GOT register.  */
   4360   1.1     skrll 	      dyn.d_un.d_ptr = elf_gp (output_bfd);
   4361   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   4362   1.1     skrll 
   4363   1.1     skrll 	    case DT_JMPREL:
   4364  1.11  christos 	      s = htab->etab.srelplt;
   4365   1.1     skrll 	      dyn.d_un.d_ptr = s->output_section->vma + s->output_offset;
   4366   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   4367   1.1     skrll 
   4368   1.1     skrll 	    case DT_PLTRELSZ:
   4369  1.11  christos 	      s = htab->etab.srelplt;
   4370   1.1     skrll 	      dyn.d_un.d_val = s->size;
   4371   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   4372   1.1     skrll 	    }
   4373   1.1     skrll 
   4374   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_elf32_swap_dyn_out (output_bfd, &dyn, dyncon);
   4375   1.1     skrll 	}
   4376   1.1     skrll     }
   4377   1.1     skrll 
   4378   1.6  christos   if (sgot != NULL && sgot->size != 0)
   4379   1.1     skrll     {
   4380   1.1     skrll       /* Fill in the first entry in the global offset table.
   4381   1.1     skrll 	 We use it to point to our dynamic section, if we have one.  */
   4382   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
   4383   1.1     skrll 		  sdyn ? sdyn->output_section->vma + sdyn->output_offset : 0,
   4384   1.6  christos 		  sgot->contents);
   4385   1.1     skrll 
   4386   1.1     skrll       /* The second entry is reserved for use by the dynamic linker.  */
   4387   1.6  christos       memset (sgot->contents + GOT_ENTRY_SIZE, 0, GOT_ENTRY_SIZE);
   4388   1.1     skrll 
   4389   1.1     skrll       /* Set .got entry size.  */
   4390   1.6  christos       elf_section_data (sgot->output_section)
   4391   1.1     skrll 	->this_hdr.sh_entsize = GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   4392   1.1     skrll     }
   4393   1.1     skrll 
   4394  1.11  christos   if (htab->etab.splt != NULL && htab->etab.splt->size != 0)
   4395   1.1     skrll     {
   4396   1.7  christos       /* Set plt entry size to 0 instead of PLT_ENTRY_SIZE, since we add the
   4397   1.7  christos 	 plt stubs and as such the section does not hold a table of fixed-size
   4398   1.7  christos 	 entries.  */
   4399  1.11  christos       elf_section_data (htab->etab.splt->output_section)->this_hdr.sh_entsize = 0;
   4400   1.1     skrll 
   4401   1.1     skrll       if (htab->need_plt_stub)
   4402   1.1     skrll 	{
   4403   1.1     skrll 	  /* Set up the .plt stub.  */
   4404  1.11  christos 	  memcpy (htab->etab.splt->contents
   4405  1.11  christos 		  + htab->etab.splt->size - sizeof (plt_stub),
   4406   1.1     skrll 		  plt_stub, sizeof (plt_stub));
   4407   1.1     skrll 
   4408  1.11  christos 	  if ((htab->etab.splt->output_offset
   4409  1.11  christos 	       + htab->etab.splt->output_section->vma
   4410  1.11  christos 	       + htab->etab.splt->size)
   4411   1.6  christos 	      != (sgot->output_offset
   4412   1.6  christos 		  + sgot->output_section->vma))
   4413   1.1     skrll 	    {
   4414  1.11  christos 	      _bfd_error_handler
   4415   1.1     skrll 		(_(".got section not immediately after .plt section"));
   4416  1.14  christos 	      return false;
   4417   1.1     skrll 	    }
   4418   1.1     skrll 	}
   4419   1.1     skrll     }
   4420   1.1     skrll 
   4421  1.14  christos   return true;
   4422   1.1     skrll }
   4423   1.1     skrll 
   4424   1.1     skrll /* Called when writing out an object file to decide the type of a
   4425   1.1     skrll    symbol.  */
   4426   1.1     skrll static int
   4427   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_elf_get_symbol_type (Elf_Internal_Sym *elf_sym, int type)
   4428   1.1     skrll {
   4429   1.1     skrll   if (ELF_ST_TYPE (elf_sym->st_info) == STT_PARISC_MILLI)
   4430   1.1     skrll     return STT_PARISC_MILLI;
   4431   1.1     skrll   else
   4432   1.1     skrll     return type;
   4433   1.1     skrll }
   4434   1.1     skrll 
   4435   1.1     skrll /* Misc BFD support code.  */
   4436   1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_is_local_label_name    elf_hppa_is_local_label_name
   4437   1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_reloc_type_lookup	     elf_hppa_reloc_type_lookup
   4438   1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_reloc_name_lookup      elf_hppa_reloc_name_lookup
   4439   1.1     skrll #define elf_info_to_howto		     elf_hppa_info_to_howto
   4440   1.1     skrll #define elf_info_to_howto_rel		     elf_hppa_info_to_howto_rel
   4441   1.1     skrll 
   4442   1.1     skrll /* Stuff for the BFD linker.  */
   4443   1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_final_link	     elf32_hppa_final_link
   4444   1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_link_hash_table_create elf32_hppa_link_hash_table_create
   4445   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_adjust_dynamic_symbol    elf32_hppa_adjust_dynamic_symbol
   4446   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_copy_indirect_symbol     elf32_hppa_copy_indirect_symbol
   4447   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_check_relocs	     elf32_hppa_check_relocs
   4448  1.11  christos #define elf_backend_relocs_compatible	     _bfd_elf_relocs_compatible
   4449   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_create_dynamic_sections  elf32_hppa_create_dynamic_sections
   4450   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_fake_sections	     elf_hppa_fake_sections
   4451   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_relocate_section	     elf32_hppa_relocate_section
   4452   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_hide_symbol		     elf32_hppa_hide_symbol
   4453   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_finish_dynamic_symbol    elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_symbol
   4454   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_finish_dynamic_sections  elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_sections
   4455   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_size_dynamic_sections    elf32_hppa_size_dynamic_sections
   4456   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_init_index_section	     _bfd_elf_init_1_index_section
   4457   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_gc_mark_hook	     elf32_hppa_gc_mark_hook
   4458   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_grok_prstatus	     elf32_hppa_grok_prstatus
   4459   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_grok_psinfo		     elf32_hppa_grok_psinfo
   4460   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_object_p		     elf32_hppa_object_p
   4461   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_final_write_processing   elf_hppa_final_write_processing
   4462   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_get_symbol_type	     elf32_hppa_elf_get_symbol_type
   4463   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_reloc_type_class	     elf32_hppa_reloc_type_class
   4464   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_action_discarded	     elf_hppa_action_discarded
   4465   1.1     skrll 
   4466   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_can_gc_sections	     1
   4467   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_can_refcount	     1
   4468   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_plt_alignment	     2
   4469   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_want_got_plt	     0
   4470   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_plt_readonly	     0
   4471   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_want_plt_sym	     0
   4472   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_got_header_size	     8
   4473  1.11  christos #define elf_backend_want_dynrelro	     1
   4474   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_rela_normal		     1
   4475  1.11  christos #define elf_backend_dtrel_excludes_plt	     1
   4476  1.11  christos #define elf_backend_no_page_alias	     1
   4477   1.1     skrll 
   4478   1.7  christos #define TARGET_BIG_SYM		hppa_elf32_vec
   4479   1.1     skrll #define TARGET_BIG_NAME		"elf32-hppa"
   4480   1.1     skrll #define ELF_ARCH		bfd_arch_hppa
   4481   1.3  christos #define ELF_TARGET_ID		HPPA32_ELF_DATA
   4482   1.1     skrll #define ELF_MACHINE_CODE	EM_PARISC
   4483   1.1     skrll #define ELF_MAXPAGESIZE		0x1000
   4484   1.1     skrll #define ELF_OSABI		ELFOSABI_HPUX
   4485   1.1     skrll #define elf32_bed		elf32_hppa_hpux_bed
   4486   1.1     skrll 
   4487   1.1     skrll #include "elf32-target.h"
   4488   1.1     skrll 
   4489   1.1     skrll #undef TARGET_BIG_SYM
   4490   1.7  christos #define TARGET_BIG_SYM		hppa_elf32_linux_vec
   4491   1.1     skrll #undef TARGET_BIG_NAME
   4492   1.1     skrll #define TARGET_BIG_NAME		"elf32-hppa-linux"
   4493   1.1     skrll #undef ELF_OSABI
   4494   1.6  christos #define ELF_OSABI		ELFOSABI_GNU
   4495   1.1     skrll #undef elf32_bed
   4496   1.1     skrll #define elf32_bed		elf32_hppa_linux_bed
   4497   1.1     skrll 
   4498   1.1     skrll #include "elf32-target.h"
   4499   1.1     skrll 
   4500   1.1     skrll #undef TARGET_BIG_SYM
   4501   1.7  christos #define TARGET_BIG_SYM		hppa_elf32_nbsd_vec
   4502   1.1     skrll #undef TARGET_BIG_NAME
   4503   1.1     skrll #define TARGET_BIG_NAME		"elf32-hppa-netbsd"
   4504   1.1     skrll #undef ELF_OSABI
   4505   1.1     skrll #define ELF_OSABI		ELFOSABI_NETBSD
   4506   1.1     skrll #undef elf32_bed
   4507   1.1     skrll #define elf32_bed		elf32_hppa_netbsd_bed
   4508   1.1     skrll 
   4509   1.1     skrll #include "elf32-target.h"
   4510